ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS

Atlas Specialty Metals – Technical Handbook of Bar Products

The Atlas Specialty Metals

Technical Handbook
of

Bar Products

ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS

TECHNICAL SERVICES DEPARTMENT

Copyright © Atlas Specialty Metals Technical Assistance: Freecall 1800 818 599
Revised: January 2005 Email: tech@atlasmetals.com.au

TECHNICAL SERVICES 1800 818 599

Email: tech@atlasmetals.com.au

PROJECT SERVICES (03) 9272 9999

Email: projects@atlasmetals.com.au www.atlasmetals.com.au www.atlasmetals.com.au
PRINTED: JANUARY 2005 – EDITION #1

LIMITATION OF LIABILITY

The information contained in this Handbook is not intended to be an exhaustive statement of all
relevant data applicable to special and general steel products. It has been designed as a guide for
customers of Atlas Specialty Metals. No responsibility is implied or accepted for or in conjunction
with quality or standard of any product or its suitability for any purpose or use.

It is the responsibility of the user to ensure product specified is fit for the purpose intended.

All conditions, warranties, obligations and liabilities of any kind which are or may be implied or
imposed to the contrary by any statute, rule or regulation or under the general law and whether
arising from the negligence of the Company, its servants or otherwise are hereby excluded except to
the extent that the Company may be prevented by any statute, rule or regulation from doing so.

Published by Atlas Specialty Metals Technical Services Department

Copyright © Atlas Specialty Metals

“….you know mate, developing and

innovating my products is ongoing; so is
the support of my supplier”
Nat Prendergast
Prendergast Fasteners Pty Ltd
Queensland
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1 PRODUCT PROGRAM 3

1.1 COMPANY PROFILE 5

1.2 PROCESSING SERVICES 5
1.3 TECHNICAL SERVICES 5
1.4 WEBSITE 6
1.5 FREE MACHINING CARBON STEELS 6
1.6 CARBON STEELS 7
1.7 THROUGH-HARDENING ALLOY STEELS 7
1.8 CASE-HARDENING ALLOY STEELS 8
1.9 STAINLESS STEELS 9
1.10 HOLLOW BAR 12
1.11 CAST IRON AND HYDRAULIC PRODUCTS 13
1.12 ALUMINIUM MACHINING BAR 13

2 STOCK RANGE 15

3 PROPERTIES OF STEEL GRADES COMPARED 19

3.1 CHEMICAL COMPOSITION OF THE VARIOUS STEEL GRADES 21

3.2 GRADE QUICK REFERENCE CHART 22
3.3 THE STRENGTH OF THE VARIOUS STEEL GRADES 23
3.4 STRENGTH AND TOUGHNESS 24
3.5 PROPERTIES OF CASE–HARDENING STEELS 25

4 PRODUCT DATASHEETS 27

4.1 ATLAS M1020: CARBON STEEL BRIGHT BAR 29

4.2 ATLAS M1030: CARBON STEEL BRIGHT BAR 31
4.3 ATLAS 1045: MEDIUM-TENSILE CARBON STEEL BAR 33
4.4 ATLAS 1214FM: FREE MACHINING STEEL BRIGHT CARBON BAR 36
4.5 ATLAS 12L14FM: FREE MACHINING STEEL BRIGHT CARBON BAR 38
4.6 ATLAS 4140: THROUGH–HARDENING LOW ALLOY STEEL BAR 40
4.7 ATLAS 6582: THROUGH–HARDENING LOW ALLOY STEEL BAR 43
4.8 ATLAS 4340: THROUGH–HARDENING LOW ALLOY STEEL BAR 46
4.9 ATLAS 6580: THROUGH–HARDENING LOW ALLOY STEEL BAR 49
4.10 ATLAS 8620H: CASE–HARDENING STEEL BAR 52
4.11 ATLAS 6587: CASE–HARDENING ALLOY STEEL BAR 54
4.12 ATLAS 6657: CASE–HARDENING ALLOY STEEL BAR 56
4.13 ATLAS MICRO900: HIGH-TENSILE MICRO-ALLOY STEEL BAR 58
 4.14 ATLAS 303: FREE MACHINING STAINLESS STEEL BAR 60
4.15 ATLAS 304: STAINLESS STEEL BAR 63
4.16 ATLAS 316: STAINLESS STEEL BAR 65
4.17 ATLAS 420: STAINLESS STEEL BAR 68
4.18 ATLAS 431: STAINLESS STEEL BAR 70
4.19 ATLAS 2205: DUPLEX STAINLESS STEEL BAR 73
4.20 ATLAS UR52N+: DUPLEX STAINLESS STEEL BAR 75
4.21 ATLAS 2011: ALUMINIUM MACHINING BAR 77
4.22 ATLAS 6262: ALUMINIUM MACHINING BAR 80

5 NON DESTRUCTIVE TESTING OF ATLAS BAR PRODUCTS 83

5.1 HOW DOES ULTRASONIC INSPECTION WORK? 83

5.2 WHY IS ULTRASONIC INSPECTION AN ISSUE? 85
5.3 ULTRASONIC INSPECTION OF ATLAS ALLOY BAR 86

6 HEAT TREATMENT AND SURFACE TREATMENT OF STEELS 87

6.1 AS ROLLED & AS FORGED 89

6.2 ANNEALING 89
6.3 NORMALISING 89
6.4 HARDENING & TEMPERING 90
6.5 SURFACE HARDENING OF STEELS 93
6.6 CASE HARDENING – CARBURISING 93
6.7 NITRIDING 94
6.8 SELECTIVE SURFACE HARDENING 95
6.9 FLAME HARDENING 95
6.10 INDUCTION HARDENING 95

7 MACHINABILITY AND MACHINABILITY DATASHEETS 97

7.1 MACHINING AND MACHINABILITY 99

7.2 MACHINING OF CARBON AND ALLOY STEEL 100
7.3 MACHINING OF STAINLESS STEEL 110
7.4 MACHININING OF ALUMINIUM ALLOYS 124

8 TECHNICAL DATA 127

8.1 DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCES 129

8.2 METRIC – IMPERIAL CONVERSION CHART 130
8.3 HARDNESS CONVERSION TABLE 132
1. PRODUCT PROGRAM 2. STOCK RANGE
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

1.1 COMPANY PROFILE

Atlas Specialty Metals is synonymous with stainless and specialty metals and traces its heritage
to Canada where the company began the manufacture of special metals in 1918. In 1939, Atlas
Specialty Metals was established in Australia as a supplier of special metals for the Australian war
effort. More than 60 years later, Atlas is an Australian owned company and still leads the way in
stainless and selected specialty metals with a distribution warehousing and metal processing network
that encompasses more than 20 major cities and towns across Australia and New Zealand.

Mackay

Gladstone

Kalgoorlie

Nowra

Wodonga
Melbourne Shepparton

1.2 PROCESSING SERVICES

Atlas branches operate automated bandsaw and hacksaw facilities offering a complete cutting
service for your bar requirements. The local markets and regional centres are supported by the
nearest capital city when required.

1.3 TECHNICAL SERVICES

Atlas Specialty Metals has for many years taken a leadership role in the stainless and special steels
market by providing technical service support to users through our qualified and experienced staff
at our distribution and processing operations.
The Atlas Specialty Metals Technical Department supports customers and sales personnel in order
to:

• assist with grade selection and metallurgical properties of our products

• assist with product selection to meet specific needs
• assist with the nomination and interpretation of specifications
• recommend fabrication procedures
• investigate problems when they occur and
• train staff and those of our customers in the use of stainless and specialty steels

The Technical Department has a fully equipped metallurgical laboratory, which is accredited by
NATA for tensile testing and hardness testing. It also has facilities for conducting metallographic
examinations.

The Department establishes and maintains the quality standards for product supply from mills
and conducts a testing program to ensure product sold by Atlas Specialty Metals meets those
standards.

Customers are invited to take advantage of the technical service provided by Atlas Specialty Metals;
all enquiries can be directed to:
Freecall: 1800 818 599
Email: tech@atlasmetals.com.au 5
 ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

1.4 WEBSITE
www.atlasmetals.com.au has a lot to offer, including more information about our company, products
and services, however it is the quantity and quality of our technical and product information that
makes our site unique. As it contains some of the information from this technical manual, we
believe there is no other Australian website that contains such detailed and practical information
for Engineering Products.

1.5 FREE MACHINING CARBON STEELS

1.5.1 MAIN GRADES STOCKED
Atlas 1214FM
Is a low carbon free-machining steel with excellent machinability for non-critical engineering
applications.
Atlas 12L14FM
Is a low carbon free-machining steel with lead addition. Machinability superior to 1214FM in high-
speed machining. Application in non-critical engineering applications. Cannot be welded.
1.5.2 SOME FACTS ON FREE MACHINING STEELS
Free machining steels are designed to optimise the results of machining by:
• the use of high cutting speeds and feedrates (low cycle times)
• high tool life
• good chip form, good chipability
• high surface finish in the minimum of operations
• low energy consumption
• accurate dimensional control
• consistency of performance.

Free machining steels are steels to which Sulphur and Phosphorus are added, hence they are called
resulphurised and rephosphorised steels. The role of adding Sulphur is to create manganese sulphide
inclusions which are very soft and act as an internal lubrication during the machining operation.
The role of rephosphorising is to create embrittlement of the ferritic matrix in order to give rise to
“micro-cracking” which improves chip breakability and dimensional stability during machining.
Lead is also added to some free machining steel as lead particles in steel also act as an internal
lubricant. It must be mentioned that additions of sulphur and lead have detrimental effects on hot
workability, weldability, and formability. Elongated manganese sulphide inclusions also impair
transverse ductility and toughness. Therefore, the use of machinability enhancers (especially sulphur)
may have to be restricted for safety critical applications of engineering steels where functionality is
the primary consideration.

The addition and combination of sulphur and lead in a low carbon free machining steel is very
effective in reducing the cutting loads. The lead addition to free machining steels also contributes to
reducing the height of the ‘built-up-edge’ on the tool while maintaining its effectiveness in protecting
a high speed steel cutting edge. Leaded free-machining steels are very suitable for machining at
extremely high speeds (surface speed > 400 m/min).

6
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

1.6 CARBON STEELS

1.6.1 MAIN GRADES STOCKED
Atlas M1020:
All-purpose low carbon steel with good ductility and weldability. Application in non-critical
engineering applications.
Atlas M1030:
All-purpose medium carbon steel with intermediate strength, good ductility and weldability.
Application in low-stress engineering applications.
Atlas 1045:
Carbon steel for low to medium stress mechanical and automotive components. Can be heat treated
by hardening and tempering (recommended for small and medium sections only) and surface-
hardened.
1.6.2 SOME FACTS ON CARBON STEELS
A plain carbon steel is essentially an iron and carbon alloy which also contains minor amounts
of manganese and a number of residual elements. Two relevant groups of carbon steels are low
carbon steels with C-content lower than 0.30% and medium carbon steels with C-content in the
range 0.30-0.60%. Low carbon steels like M1020 have essentially a ferritic micro-structure which
is soft. Medium carbon steel have a ferritic-pearlitic micro-structure and have therefore higher
hardness. Low carbon steels are quite tough but have low tensile strength and wear resistance.
Medium carbon steels can be heat treated in order to create a martensitic structure that has a good
combination of strength and toughness after tempering. The response of medium carbon steels to a
quench and temper heat treatment is very limited and the depth of hardening is low. Carbon steels
are successfully used where strength requirements are not too critical. For large sections, higher
required material strengths and critical applications low-alloy steels would normally be suggested.

1.7 THROUGH-HARDENING ALLOY STEELS

1.7.1 MAIN GRADES STOCKED
Atlas 4140:
General purpose CrMo-alloyed heat-treatable steel with high toughness, for mechanical engineering
and mining applications, such as fasteners, connecting rods and pins. The grade is generally used for
lighter cross-sections. It is also suitable for components for certain low-temperature applications.
Atlas 4340:
CrNiMo-alloyed heat-treatable steel for highly-stressed parts in general mechanical engineering with
large cross-sections and high toughness requirements, such as axles, pins, fasteners, shafts and gear
components.
Atlas 6582:
CrNiMo-alloyed heat-treatable steel with very high hardenability for highly-stressed parts in general
mechanical engineering applications where large cross-sections and very high toughness are the
requirements, such as axles, pins, fasteners, shafts and gear components.
Atlas 6580:
CrNiMo-alloyed heat-treatable steel for components under high dynamic stress in mining and
general engineering applications. Especially suited for medium and large cross-sections where
high and uniform toughness requirements over the cross-section exist, such pinions, gear parts and
drive shafts.
7
 ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

1.7.2 SOME FACTS ON THROUGH-HARDENING STEELS

Through-hardening steels are engineering steels that, because of their chemical composition, are
suitable for hardening. They have good toughness at a given tensile strength in the quenched and
tempered condition.

From the perspective of component manufacture, it is usually desirable that the steel assumes roughly
the same mechanical properties over the component cross-section after heat treatment. For small
sections this can be achieved with unalloyed steels (like 1045), for medium sized sections Cr-Mo steel
are required (like 4140) and for very large sections only Cr-Ni-Mo can give the desired properties.

The combination of high strength and high toughness in through-hardening steels is the result of
achieving a 100% martensitic structure in the steel after quenching. This structure is very hard
and will be tempered by reheating the steel again to a lower temperature in order to decrease
hardness and improve ductility and impact properties of the steel. The final strength and ductility of a
through-hardening steel depend on the tempering temperature and time chosen. Generally through-
hardening steels are tempered in the range 500 – 700°C. With a higher tempering temperature,
the final strength decreases and the final ductility of the steel increases. These effects are shown in
the tempering diagram for each steel grade.

A nearly 100% martensitic structure can be achieved with 4140 steels up to approximately 120mm
diameter bar. For larger sections Atlas 6582, 4340 or Atlas 6580 are required to achieve a near 100%
martensitic structure. It should be noted that if unalloyed steels like M1030 and 1045 are heat treated,
they cannot transform into a near 100% martensitic structure. The ductility and impact properties of the
retained pearlitic-ferritic micro-structure will greatly deteriorate when increasing the tensile strength of
these steels by heat treatment.
Good through-hardening steels exhibit a high degree of cleanliness, particularly in regards to non-
metallic inclusions and need careful balancing of chemical composition in order to react uniformly
to heat treatment.

1.8 CASE-HARDENING ALLOY STEELS

1.8.1 MAIN GRADES STOCKED
Atlas 8620H:
NiCrMo-alloyed case-hardening steel primarily for small components in mechanical and automotive
applications where only intermediate core strength is required, such as gears, spiders and shafts.
Atlas 6587:
CrNiMo-alloyed case-hardening steel for heavy-duty and highly stressed transmission components
in mechanical engineering and mining applications with high demands on toughness, such as
gears, pinion gears and large shafts.
Atlas 6657:
NiCrMo-alloyed case-hardening steel with exceptional impact and fracture-toughness characteristics
in the core. Application in mining and mechanical engineering in areas requiring resistance to high
wear and high dynamic stresses.
1.8.2 SOME FACTS ON CASE–HARDENING STEELS
Case-hardening steels are essentially alloy steels with low carbon content in which a high hardness
in the surface zone (or “case”) is developed by altering the chemical composition of the surface
zone through absorption and diffusion of carbon into the steel. This is performed during a treatment
called carburising. Case hardening is the complete heat treatment which involves carburising,
8
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

holding the steel at the appropriate temperature and then quenching the steel and subsequently
tempering it at a low temperature.
After case hardening a component is characterised by a surface with high hardness and a relatively
soft core zone which has good toughness. Typically surface hardness of 57 – 63 HRC can be
achieved, whilst the carbon content in the surface layer has increased to approximately 0.7%.
Case hardening of plain carbon steels is possible, but such steels have poor core strength and the
application is limited to low-stressed and small components.
If a component is subject to high stresses, then apart from a high surface hardness for wear resistance
purpose, strength of the core is also needed. For such applications alloyed case-hardening steels are
needed. Alloyed case-hardening steels have better through-hardening properties and hence as a result
of the heat treatment the core areas will also be affected. In order to maintain the toughness of the
core, thus avoiding the risk of brittle fracture at the higher tensile strength levels, Nickel is added as an
alloying element. Nickel also contributes to retaining toughness in the surface area after carburising.
Cr-Ni-Mo case-hardening steels, like Atlas 6587 and Atlas 6657, have been developed to ensure
good wear resisting properties in the case whilst have high strength and toughness in the core area
even in very large cross-sections.
Good case-hardening steels exhibit a high degree of cleanliness, particularly in regards to non-
metallic inclusions, and need careful balancing of chemical composition in order to react uniformly
to heat treatment. The quality of case-hardening steels shows also in their fine-grain stability. Fine-
grain stability results in low distortion of the component after the case hardening process. Good
mills achieve fine-grain stability through control of aluminium and nitrogen content.
1.9 STAINLESS STEELS
1.9.1 MAIN GRADES STOCKED
Atlas 303:
Atlas 303 represents the optimum in machinability among the austenitic stainless steels. It is primarily
used when production involves extensive machining.
Atlas 303 is generally available as a UGIMA® and new generation UGIMA®2 with machinability
significantly higher than that of the standard 303.
Atlas 304:
Atlas 304 is dual certified as grades 304 and 304L. Grade
304 is the standard “18/8” stainless. It has excellent forming
and welding characteristics. Grade 304L, the low carbon
version of 304, does not require post-weld annealing and so
is extensively used in heavy gauge components. Atlas 304
is generally available as a UGIMA® and new generation
UGIMA®2 with machinability significantly higher than that of
the standard 304.
Atlas 316:
Atlas 316 is dual certified as grades 316 and 316L. Atlas 316
is the standard molybdenum-bearing stainless steel, second
in importance to 304 amongst the austenitic stainless steels.
The molybdenum gives 316 better overall corrosion resistant
properties than Grade 304, particularly higher resistance
to pitting and crevice corrosion in chloride environments. It
has excellent forming and welding characteristics. Atlas 316
is generally available as a UGIMA® and new generation
UGIMA®2 with machinability significantly higher than that
of the standard 316. 9
 ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

Atlas 420:
Atlas 420 stainless steel can be hardened by quench-and-temper heat treatment. It contains a minimum
of 12 per cent chromium, just sufficient to give corrosion resistance properties. It has good ductility in
the annealed condition but is capable of being hardened up to Rockwell Hardness 50HRC, the highest
hardness of the 12 per cent chromium grades. Like all martensitic stainless steels its best corrosion
resistance is achieved when the metal is hardened and surface ground or polished. Variants of grade
420 are available with different carbon contents; these are designated as 420A, 420B, etc.
Atlas 420 is generally available as a UGIMA® with machinability significantly higher than that of
the standard 420.
Atlas 431:
A heat treatable martensitic, nickel-bearing grade with the best corrosion resistance properties of all
the martensitic grades. It has excellent tensile and torque strength, and good toughness, making it
ideally suited to shafting and bolt applications. It can be hardened to approximately 40HRC. Atlas
431 is generally available as a new generation UGIMA® with machinability significantly higher
than that of the standard 431.
Atlas 2205:
Atlas 2205 is the most widely used duplex (ferritic/austenitic) stainless steel grade. It finds
applications due to both excellent corrosion resistance and high strength, which is about double of
that of the austenitic grades 304 and 316. The duplex structure also results in excellent resistance
to stress corrosion cracking.
Atlas UR52N+:
Atlas UR52N+ is one of a group of “super duplex” grades, combining high strength with exceptional
corrosion resistance. The addition of copper to this grade gives it greatly improved resistance to
strong reducing acids, particularly sulphuric acid. UR52N+ is also very highly resistant to pitting/
crevice corrosion in high chloride, hot environments. Its duplex structure also results in excellent
resistance to stress corrosion cracking.
Atlas 630:
Atlas 630 is a precipitation-hardening steel that has a combination of high hardness and strength
after suitable heat treatment. It has corrosion resistance similar to Atlas 304. Grade 630 is often
referred to as 17/4 PH.

1.9.2 SOME FACTS ON STAINLESS STEELS

Stainless steels are iron based alloys containing a minimum of about 10.5% chromium; this forms a
protective self-healing chromium-oxide film, which is the reason why this group of steels have their
characteristic “stainlessness” or corrosion resistance. The ability of the oxide layer to heal itself
means that the steel is corrosion resistant, no matter how much of the surface is removed. Although
all stainless steels depend on the presence of chromium, other alloying elements are often added to
enhance their properties. The categorisation of stainless steels is unusual amongst metals in that it
is based upon the nature of their metallurgical structure.

1.9.2.1 Austenitic Stainless Steels

This group contain at least 16% chromium and 6% nickel (the basic grade 304 is sometimes
referred to as 18/8) and range through to the high alloy or “super austenitics” such as 904L and
6% molybdenum grades. Additional elements can be added such as molybdenum, titanium or
copper, to modify or improve their properties, making them suitable for many critical applications
involving high temperature as well as corrosion resistance. This group of steels is also suitable for
cryogenic applications because the effect of the nickel content in making the steel austenitic avoids
the problems of brittleness at low temperatures, which is a characteristic of other types of steel.
10
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

1.9.2.2 Ferritic Stainless Steels

These are plain chromium (10.5 to 18%) grades such as Grade 430 and 409. Their moderate
corrosion resistance and poor fabrication properties are improved in the higher alloyed grades
such as 434 and 439. Resistance to stress-corrosion cracking is the most obvious advantage of the
ferritic stainless steels. Ferritic steels resist chloride and caustic stress corrosion cracking very well.

1.9.2.3 Martensitic Stainless Steels

Martensitic stainless steels are also based on the addition of chromium as the major alloying
element but with a higher carbon and generally lower chromium content (eg 12% in Grade 420)
than the ferritic types; Grade 431 has a chromium content of about 16%, but the microstructure is
still martensite despite this high chromium level because this grade also contains 2% nickel.

1.9.2.4 Duplex Stainless Steels

Duplex stainless steels such as 2205 and 2507 (these designations indicate compositions of 22%
chromium, 5% nickel and 25% chromium, 7% nickel but both grades contain further minor alloying
additions) have microstructures comprising a mixture of austenite and ferrite. Duplex ferritic - austenitic
steels combine some of the features of each class: they are resistant to stress corrosion cracking,
albeit not quite as resistant as the ferritic steels; their toughness is superior to that of the ferritic steels
but inferior to that of the austenitic steels, and their strength is greater than that of the (annealed)
austenitic steels, by a factor of about two. In addition the duplex steels have general corrosion
resistances equal to or better than 304 and 316, and in general their pitting corrosion resistances
are superior to 316. They suffer reduced toughness below about -50°C and after exposure above
300°C, so are only used between these temperatures.

1.9.2.5 Precipitation Hardening Stainless Steels

These are chromium and nickel containing steels which can develop very high tensile strengths. The
most common grade in this group is “17-4 PH”; also known as Grade 630, with the composition
of 17% chromium, 4% nickel, 4% copper and 0.3% niobium. The great advantage of these steels
is that they can be supplied in the “solution treated” condition; in this condition the steel is just
machinable. Following machining, forming etc. the steel can be hardened by a single, fairly low
temperature “ageing” heat treatment which causes no distortion of the component.

1.9.2.6 General characteristics of Stainless Steels

Magnetic Work Corrosion High Low
ALLOY Temperature
Response Hardening Resistance Hardenable Ductility Temperature Resistance Weldability
GROUP (note 1) Rate (note2) Resistance (note 3)

Austenitic Generally No Very High High By Cold Work Very High Very High Very High Very High

Duplex Yes Medium Very High No Medium Low Medium High

Ferritic Yes Medium Medium No Medium High Low Low

Martensitic Yes Medium Medium Quench & Temper Low Low Low Low
Precipitation Age Medium
Yes Medium Medium Low Low Low
Hardening Hardening to Low

NOTES:
1) Attraction of the steel to a magnet. Note some austenitic grades can be attracted to a magnet
if cold worked.
2) Varies significantly between grades within each group. e.g. free machining grades have lower
corrosion resistances, those grades higher in molybdenum have higher resistances.
3) Measured by toughness and ductility at sub-zero temperatures. Austenitic grades retain ductility to
cryogenic temperatures.
11
 ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

1.10 HOLLOW BAR

1.10.1 MAIN PRODUCTS STOCKED
Atlas Carbon Steel Hollow Bar:
Atlas Carbon Steel Hollow Bar is supplied in two grades. Grade 20MnVS6 (WNr 1.5217) for
sizes 32-250mm and Grade St 52.0 or E355 in new nomenclature (WNr 1.0421) for all sizes
250-457mm.

20MnVS6 is a micro-alloy steel with improved mechanical properties and with controlled sulphur
content to improve machinability. St52.0 is a plain carbon steel defined by specific mechanical
properties. Atlas carbon steel hollow bar is an all-purpose mechanical tube suited for low and
medium-stress applications.

Atlas 4140 Hollow Bar:

Atlas 4140 Hollow Bar is a low-alloy through-hardening steel hollow bar, generally supplied in the
hardened and tempered condition. It is used in mining and general engineering for medium and high
stress applications.
Atlas 316 Hollow Bar:
Atlas 316 Hollow Bar is a stainless steel Grade 316L hollow bar. It possesses good corrosion resisting
properties, particularly higher resistance to pitting and crevice corrosion in chloride environments
compared to grade 304. It has excellent forming and welding characteristics. Atlas 316 Hollow Bar
is generally available in VALIMA® improved machinability which is produced from stainless steel 316
UGIMA® billets.

12
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

1.11 CAST IRON AND HYDRAULIC PRODUCTS

1.11.1 MAIN PRODUCTS STOCKED

Atlas Chrome Bar:
Atlas Chrome Bar is a hard chromium-plated centreless ground bar supplied in Grade 1045 or in
Grade 4140 heat treated. The standard 1045 Chrome Bar is supplied in the normalised condition
but it is also available in an induction hardened condition.
Chrome bar is primarily used as piston rod material in all standard applications in hydraulics and
pneumatics. Standard 1045 chrome bar is used for low to medium stress applications.

Chrome bar 4140 HT is used when high yield strength for medium to high stress applications is the
dominant design parameter. Chrome bar 1045 induction-hardened is used when surface hardness
(55-65 HRC) is the primary design criterion and lower strength of the core is acceptable.

Atlas Hydraulic Line Tube:

Atlas Hydraulic Line Tube is a cold drawn seamless, low carbon steel tube supplied in the normalised
condition. It is characterised by excellent weldability and formability ensuring ease of bending and
flaring. Hydraulic line tube is applied in the hydraulic and pneumatic industries, as well as in general
engineering.
Atlas U250 Cast Iron:
Ferritic-Pearlitic flake-graphite cast iron grade. This is a cast iron product of medium hardness (180
– 220 HB) and is therefore recommended for uses where a balance is required between mechanical
properties and machinability.
Atlas U300 Cast Iron:
Pearlitic flake-graphite cast iron grade. This is one of the hardest qualities in flake or grey iron
with hardness range 200 – 250 HB. It is therefore used when high tensile strength and/or wear-
resistance is required, because of its pearlitic structure. Its surface finish is excellent because of its
superior structural cohesion. This grade can be surface hardened.
Atlas U400 Cast Iron:
Spheroidal-graphite ferritic cast iron grade, also referred to as ductile or “SG” cast iron. It is applied
when higher strength, machinability and a good surface finish are the required characteristics.
Because of its ferritic structure it is recommended for uses requiring high heat and/or electrical
conductivity, as well as good magnetic permeability. It possesses high ductility and reasonable
toughness.

1.12 ALUMINIUM MACHINING BAR

1.12.1 MAIN GRADES STOCKED
Atlas 2011
This aluminium alloy has superior machining performance, it is especially suitable for high-speed
machining. It is a short-chipping aluminium alloy due to additions of Lead and Bismuth and can be
applied to minimize machining costs. It has limited corrosion resistance and anodizing properties
and is generally not recommended for welding and/or brazing. Aluminium alloy 2011 has strength
that is comparable to that of a mild steel.
Atlas 6262
This is contemporary aluminium alloy that combines very good machinability with excellent corrosion
resistance and anodizing properties. It is has good weldability and can be brazed as well. The
machinability of this alloy is significantly higher than that of comparable alloys like 6061 and
6082. 13
 ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

1.12.2 SOME FACTS ON ALUMINIUM ALLOYS

Aluminium alloys are classified by composition using a 4 digit number, where the first digit specifies
the major alloying element(s). The table below gives an overview over the different groups of
aluminium alloys and their designation.

1xxx Super- or commercial-purity aluminium Non-heat-treatable

2xxx Al-Cu(-Mg) Heat-treatable
3xxx Al-Mn(-Mg) Non-heat-treatable
4xxx Al-Si Non-heat-treatable
5xxx Al-Mg Non-heat-treatable
6xxx Al-Mg-Si Heat-treatable
7xxx Al-Zn-Mg(-Cu) Heat-treatable
8xxx Other alloys

As aluminium is naturally a very soft metal, some aluminium alloys can be subjected to a heat
treatment process in order to increase the final mechanical properties. This heat treatment is called
precipitation hardening or age hardening: 2xxx, 6xxx and 7xxx alloys can be strengthened by
precipitation hardening, or ‘ageing’.
Small, finely dispersed precipitates are formed during this heat treatment, which significantly
increase the strength of the alloy. Temper designations are used to indicate whether an alloy has
undergone any heat treatment. Temper designations are also used to indicate whether the alloy has
been subjected to cold-working after extrusion.

14
1. PRODUCT PROGRAM 2. STOCK RANGE
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

Atlas Specialty Metals stock 1700 different bar products. The table gives an overview of the stocking program.
Product Section Finish Condition Size Range Metric Imperial # of Sizes
16.0x3.0mm
U1004 Flat CD x x 20
– 100.0x5.0mm
4.76 - 152.40mm
Round CD/SMTP x x 65
9.52x4.76mm –
M1020 Flat CD/SMTP 152.40x25.40mm x x 40
Square CD/SMTP 25.40 - 101.60mm x x 10
M1030 Round CD/SMTP 6.0mm - 130mm x x 60
Round CD/SMTP 4.76 - 152.40mm x x 85
1214FM Hex CD/SMTP 6.35 - 76.20mm x x 50
Square CD/SMTP 4.76 - 100.0mm x x 30
Round CD/SMTP 3.97mm - 90.0mm x x 60
12L14FM Hex CD/SMTP 7.94 - 55.00mm x x 55
Square CD/SMTP 12.70 - 70.0mm x x 15
1045 Round BLK AR/NOR 36 - 455mm x 60
Round SMTP AR 10 - 110mm x x 65
1040/1045
Round CG AR 25.40 - 130.0mm x x 15
Round BLK H&T 16 - 220mm x 35
Round CD/SMTP/PLD H&T 6.35 - 450mm x x 100
4140
Round CG H&T 12.70 - 110.0mm x x 25
Hex CD H&T 24 - 55mm x x 10
4340 Round BLK/PLD H&T 38 - 320mm x 55
Atlas 6582 Round PLD H&T 80 - 380mm x 25
Atlas 6580 Round BLK H&T 40 - 200mm x 30
Atlas 8620H Round CD/PLD ANN 35 - 90mm x 10
Atlas 6587 Round BLK/PLD ANN 50 - 360mm x 40
Atlas 6657 Round PLD ANN 30 - 185mm x 25
EN39B Round PLD ANN 90 - 200mm x 10
20MnVS6 Hollow CD/BLK AR 32x16mm - 419x319mm x 160
4140 Hollow CD/BLK H&T 45x32mm - 200x140mm x 40
316 Hollow CD/PLD ANN 32x16mm - 250x200mm x 40
Round CD/SMTP ANN 4.76 - 63.50mm x x 40
303
Hex CD ANN 9.53 - 31.75mm x 15
304 Round CD/STP/PLD ANN 4.76 - 203.20mm x x 80
316 Round CD/STP/PLD ANN 4.76 - 350.0mm x x 110
316 Hex CD ANN 9.35 - 57.15mm x 35
316 Square CD ANN 6.35 - 40.0mm x x 15
431 Round CD/SMTP/CG H&T 6.35 - 116.0mm x x 35
2205 Round CD/CG ANN 12.0 - 101.60mm x x 25
Cast IronU250,U300 Hollow RM AC 60x40mm – 300x180mm x 55
Cast Iron U250, U400, U500 Round BLK AC 40-400 x 36
Chrome Bar 1045 CG/CR IND HARD 19.05 - 101.60mm x x 10
Chrome Bar 4140 CG/CR H&T 25.00 - 101.60mm x x 35
Hydraulic Line Tube Hollow ASTM A179 6.40x0.90-50.80x4.88mm x 55
Alloy 2011 Round, Hex and Square in CD/EX 10 – 200mm x x 45
Alloy 6262 Round, Hex and Square in CD/EX 10 – 120mm x 30

Finish: CD = cold drawn, SMTP = smooth turned and polished, PLD = peeled, CG = centreless ground, BLK =
black, RM = rough machined, CR = hard chrome plated, EX = extruded
Condition: AR = as rolled, AC = as cast, ANN = annealed, H&T = hardened and tempered, IND HARD =
17
induction hardened, NOR=normalised
3. PROPERTIES OF STEEL GRADES COMPARED 4. PRODUCT DATASHEETS
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

3.1 CHEMICAL COMPOSITION OF THE VARIOUS STEEL GRADES

Typical composition in % of weight

Product C Mn Si S P Cr Ni Mo Other

M1020 0.15-0.25 0.30-0.90 ≤ 0.35 ≤ 0.050 ≤ 0.050

M1030 0.25-0.35 0.30-0.90 ≤ 0.35 ≤ 0.050 ≤ 0.050

1045 0.43-0.50 0.30-0.90 0.10-0.35 ≤ 0.040 ≤ 0.040

1214FM ≤ 0.15 0.70-1.20 ≤ 0.10 0.24-0.40 0.04-0.12

12L14FM ≤ 0.15 0.80-1.50 ≤ 0.10 0.25-0.40 0.04-0.11 Pb: 0.15-0.35

4140 0.37-0.44 0.65-1.10 0.10-0.35 ≤ 0.040 ≤ 0.040 0.75-1.20 0.15-0.30

4340 0.37-0.44 0.55-0.90 0.10-0.35 ≤ 0.040 ≤ 0.040 0.65-0.95 1.55-2.00 0.20-0.35

6582 0.30-0.38 0.50-0.80 ≤ 0.40 ≤ 0.035 ≤ 0.035 1.30-1.70 1.30-1.70 0.15-0.30

6580 0.26-0.34 0.30-0.60 ≤ 0.40 ≤ 0.035 ≤ 0.035 1.80-2.20 1.80-2.20 0.30-0.50

8620H 0.17-0.23 0.60-0.95 0.10-0.40 ≤ 0.040 ≤ 0.040 0.35-0.70 0.35-0.75 0.15-0.25

6587 0.15-0.21 0.50-0.90 ≤ 0.40 ≤ 0.035 ≤ 0.035 1.50-1.80 1.40-1.70 0.25-0.35

6657 0.11-0.17 0.30-0.60 ≤ 0.40 ≤ 0.035 ≤ 0.035 0.80-1.10 3.00-3.50 0.10-0.25

En25 0.27-0.35 0.45-0.70 0.10-0.40 ≤ 0.040 ≤ 0.035 0.50-0.80 2.30-2.80 0.45-0.65

En26 0.36-0.44 0.45-0.70 0.10-0.40 ≤ 0.040 ≤ 0.035 0.50-0.80 2.30-2.80 0.45-0.65

En36A 0.10-0.16 0.35-0.60 ≤ 0.35 ≤ 0.040 ≤ 0.040 0.70-1.00 3.00-3.75

En39B 0.12-0.18 0.25-0.50 0.10-0.35 ≤ 0.040 ≤ 0.035 1.00-1.40 3.90-4.30 0.15-0.30

Al: 0.015-0.030

Micro900 0.35-0.40 1.20-1.50 0.50-0.70 0.04-0.07 ≤ 0.025 Ti: 0.010-0.016

V: 0.08-0.13

XP1600 0.25 1.60 2.00 Cu,Nb,Ti

Hy-Tuf 0.25 1.35 1.50 0.30 1.80 0.40

303 ≤ 0.15 ≤ 2.00 ≤ 1.00 ≥ 0.15 ≤ 0.20 17.0-19.0 8.0-10.0

304 ≤ 0.03 ≤ 2.00 ≤ 1.00 ≤ 0.030 ≤ 0.045 18.0-20.0 8.0-12.0

316 ≤ 0.03 ≤ 2.00 ≤ 1.00 ≤ 0.030 ≤ 0.045 16.0-18.0 10.0-14.0 2.0-3.0

420 ≤ 0.15 ≤ 1.00 ≤ 1.00 ≤ 0.030 ≤ 0.040 12.0-14.0

431 ≤ 0.20 ≤ 1.00 ≤ 1.00 ≤ 0.030 ≤ 0.040 15.0-17.0 1.25-2.50

329 ≤ 0.08 ≤ 1.00 ≤ 0.75 ≤ 0.030 ≤ 0.040 23.0-28.0 2.0-5.0 1.0-2.0

2205 ≤ 0.03 ≤ 2.00 ≤ 1.00 ≤ 0.020 ≤ 0.30 21.0-23.0 4.5-6.5 2.5-3.5 N: 0.08-0.20

Cu: 0.5-3.0
UR52N+ ≤ 0.03 ≤ 1.50 ≤ 0.80 ≤ 0.020 ≤ 0.035 24.0-26.0 5.5-8.0 3.0-4.0
N: 0.20-0.35

21
22
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS � Technical Handbook of Bar Products

3.2 GRADE QUICK REFERENCE CHART 3.2

C Mn Cr Ni Mo Other Type of Steel Typical Applications

M1020 0.20 0.60 Low Carbon Low strength steel for non-critical applications
M1030 0.30 0.60 Medium Carbon For non-critical applications with higher strength than M1020
1045 0.45 0.60 Medium Carbon Medium strength steel which can be through hardened (small sections)
1214FM ≤ 0.15 0.95 S = 0.32, P = 0.08 Free Machining Low-strength but highly machinable steel for repetition engineering
S = 0.32, P = 0.08, Free Machining Low-strength steel suitable for high-speed machining in repetition engineering
12L14FM ≤ 0.15 1.15

CARBON
Pb = 0.25 environment
Al = 0.022, Medium-high stress, a lternative to 1045 and 4140 , very good weldability and
Micro900 0.38 1.35 Micro-alloy
Ti = 0.013, V = 0.11 machinability
4140 0.40 0.90 0.90 0.25 Through Hardening Medium-high stress in smaller cross-sections, has good fatigue properties
4340 0.40 0.75 0.80 1.80 0.30 Through Hardening Permanent/fluctuating stress, larger cross-sections
Permanent/fluctuating stress, larger cross-sections with high core strength;
6582 0.34 0.65 1.50 1.60 0.25 Through Hardening
preferred alternative to 4340
Highest dynamic stresses, excellent fatigue properties,, p r e fe r r e d a l te r n a ti v e to
6580 0.30 0.45 2.00 2.00 0.40 Through Hardening
En25/En26
Hy-Tuf 0.25 1.35 0.30 1.80 0.40 Si = 1.50 Through Hardening Medium stresses combined with high ductility requirement
GRADE QUICK REFERENCE CHART

En25 0.30 0.60 0.65 2.55 0.55 Through Hardening Highest dynamic stresses
En26 0.40 0.60 0.65 2.55 0.55 Through Hardening Highest dynamic stresses
8620H 0.20 0.75 0.55 0.55 0.20 Case Hardening Small diameter transmission parts, medium-low stress exposure
6587 0.18 0.65 1.65 1.55 0.30 Case Hardening Transmission parts subject to highest stresses and wear conditions

LOW-ALLOY
Parts subject to highest stresses and wear conditions, high core strength and toughness
6657 0.14 0.45 0.95 3.25 0.20 Case Hardening
required, preferred alternative to En36A, can replace En39B in certain applications
En36A 0.13 0.50 0.85 3.35 Case Hardening Transmission parts subject to highest stresses and wear conditions
En39B 0.15 0.40 1.20 4.10 0.20 Case Hardening Parts subject to highest stresses, high core strength and toughness required
XP1600 0.25 1.60 2.00 Cu, Nb, Ti Wear Resistant Highest dynamic stresses combined with abrasive wear environment
Free Machining
303 0.07 ≤ 2.00 18.0 8.0 Repetition engineering for general parts manufacture
Austenitic
304 0.05 ≤ 2.00 19.0 8.0 Austenitic Stainless Food processing, fasteners and springs
316 0.05 ≤ 2.00 17.0 10.0 2.0 Austenitic Stainless More corrosion resistance required than 304 in similar applications
420 0.2 ≤ 1.00 13.0 Martensitic High-strength components in fluid applications like shafts and sleeves
431 0.15 ≤ 1.00 16.0 1.9 Martensitic High-strength shafts, fasteners with higher corrosion resistance than 420
329 0.03 ≤ 1.00 25.0 3.5 1.5 Duplex Medium stress with excellent corrosion resistance required

STAINLESS
2205 0.02 ≤ 2.00 22.0 5.5 3.0 N = 0.15 Duplex Medium stress with excellent corrosion resistance required
UR52N+ 0.02 ≤ 1.50 25.0 6.8 3.5 Cu = 1.8, N = 0.30 Super-Duplex High-stress with excellent corrosion resistance required

Please note that this chart gives a summary only. Refer to the individual Atlas datasheets for further details.

Page 22
tl t l
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

3.3 THE STRENGTH OF THE VARIOUS STEEL GRADES

The graph below shows indicative values for the 0.2% proof stress for various products stocked by
Atlas Specialty Metals.

0.2% Proof Stress for various Steel Grades

indicative values for typical stock products in small and large diameter
1200

40mm diam.
1000
250mm diam.

800
MPa min.

600

400

200

0
n

&T

&T

&T

&T

&T

&T

ed
ac
aw

aw

An

e
al

al
Q

Q
Bl
Dr

Dr

ne

ne
1
45

40

40

80

1
45

32

An

An
41

43
d

10

41

43

65
l

10

6/
Co

Co

0/

05

+
2/

31

N
la

41
20

30

22
58

52
At

4/
10

10

s6

UR
30
M

la

3/
At

30

Atlas M1020 and M1030 have typical min. 0.2% proof stress values of 290MPa and 300MPa
respectively in cold drawn condition for 40mm diameter bar. Cold drawn bar in these grades is
available up to100mm. Cold drawn bar of 100mm diameter would generally have a 30MPa lower
min. 0.2% proof stress than 40mm bar.
Atlas 1045 in hot rolled condition has a typical 0.2% proof stress value of 305MPa min. for 40mm.
As this grade has a relatively uniform, mixed ferrite-pearlite microstructure, this value is typical for
all sizes up to a 100mm. Atlas 1045 bar in 250mm diameter would typically have a min. 0.2%
proof stress value which is 30MPa lower than that of 40mm bar.

Quenching and tempering of Atlas 1045 is reasonably effective for small diameter bar but not so
for large diameter. Due to lack of alloying elements the through-hardening response of Atlas 1045 is
quite shallow. The graph shows that in 40mm bar an increase in 0.2% proof stress of over 100MPa
or 35%-40% can be achieved by a heat treatment. Heat treatment of a 250mm section shows only
a marginal increase in strength though. It should be stressed, that hardening and tempering of Atlas
1045 adversely affects the impact properties of the steel no matter what size the cross-section.

Atlas 4140, Atlas 4340, Atlas 6582 and Atlas 6580 are all alloyed through-hardening steels.
As can be seen in the graph the advantage of Atlas6582/4340 over Atlas 4140 lies in greater
hardenability and the significantly higher min. 0.2% proof stress that can be achieved in larger
cross sections. Atlas 6580 is the ultimate through-hardening steel that gives extremely high 0.2%
proof stress for small cross-section whilst, as can be seen in the graph, a 250mm cross section still
has a 0.2% proof stress of 800MPa min.
23
 ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

Austenitic stainless steels, like Atlas 303, 304, 316 and 321 have the lowest 0.2% proof stress of
all the steels shown in the graph. The values shown in the graph are for hot rolled and/or turned
product in the annealed condition. The low 0.2% proof stress should be seen in connection with the
extremely high ductility of stainless steels. The tensile strength of these stainless steel products would
be comparable to that of Atlas M1030.
It should be noted that for all austenitic grades, annealed cold drawn bar (normally up to 25.4mm
diameter) has a 0.2% proof stress that is considerably higher and typically is at 380MPa minimum,
but can be significantly higher than this.
Martensitic stainless steels like Atlas 410/416 and Atlas 431 have the highest strength of all stainless
steels, particular Atlas 431 for which the 0.2% proof stress is almost three times as high as that of
Atlas 304/316. This is particularly interesting as Atlas 431 also possesses reasonable corrosion
resistance properties and good toughness. As can be seen in the graph, unlike the alloy through-
hardening steels, the 0.2% proof stress of martensitic stainless steels does not drop substantially as
the diameter of the cross-section increases. This is because the martensitic stainless steels have a
hardenability that is exceptionally high, which is shown by the shape of the Jominy curves.
If a combination of very high corrosion resistance and higher strength is required one has to revert
to duplex stainless steels. Again, duplex stainless steels are very uniform in their strength regardless
the diameter of the cross-section. Atlas UR52N+ is a high-strength duplex grade with a 0.2% proof
stress of 530MPa min.
In case a strength even higher than this is required it may be necessary to use a precipitation-
hardening stainless steel such as Atlas 630, but this implies a sacrifice in corrosion resistance as
compared to a duplex or a super-duplex stainless steel.

3.4 STRENGTH AND TOUGHNESS

Often and mistakenly, the tensile strength of a material is taken as the sole indication of its performance
capability. A combination of strength and toughness is the true characteristic of a good steel. This is
particularly true when the properties of carbon and alloy through-hardening steels are compared.
Toughness is a major design criterion when semi-brittle or brittle fracture needs to be avoided.
The graph below shows the minimum 0.2% proof stress and the minimum impact values for grades
Atlas 1045, Atlas 4140 and Atlas 6582.
It can be seen that with Atlas 1045 only limited strength levels can be achieved and the impact

Strength and Toughness:

the differences for Atlas 1045, Atlas 4140 and Atlas 6582

60
Atlas 1045
Atlas 4140
55
Atlas 6582
min. Charpy Impact Value (J)

50

45

40

35

30

25
values are indicative
for bars 40-100mmm
20
200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000

minimum 0.2% proof stress (MPa)

24
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

properties of this grade greatly deteriorate when hardened to higher strength. At comparable strength
levels the minimum toughness of Atlas 4140 is about three times higher than that of Atlas 1045. This
means that Atlas 4140 can absorb three times the impact needed to fracture Atlas 1045.
The graph shows that the toughness of Atlas 4140 decreases when hardening the steel to a greater
strength, but still remains at a reasonable level. If good toughness is required at higher strength levels the
application of Atlas 6582 or Atlas 6580 needs to be considered. With Atlas 6582 an approximately
50% higher strength can be achieved whilst maintaining the toughness of the material.

3.5 PROPERTIES OF CASE–HARDENING STEELS

The strength and toughness of the core after case hardening are among the most important properties
of engineering steels. For case-hardening steels that are applied in low stress situations the case
hardness and depth of the case is the most important criterion. Once the component operates in an
environment of substantial static stresses, core strength also becomes an important variable. If in
addition, dynamic stresses are present, the toughness of the core then also becomes important.
The core strength of a case-hardening steel depends, just like a through-hardening steel, on the
hardenability of the steel as expressed in the Jominy diagram (see product datasheets contained
in this handbook). After carburising of the surface layer the steel is quenched and subsequently
tempered. A major difference between case-hardening steels and through-hardening steels is the
tempering temperature. Case-hardening steels must be tempered at very low temperatures (150
– 200°) in order to retain the high hardness of the carburised layer achieved after quenching the
steel. Because of the low carbon content in the core section, the steel maintains some ductility even
at such low tempering temperatures.
As for alloyed through-hardening steels, a higher alloy content is needed to ensure a deeper
hardening. The following graph shows the tensile strength after the case hardening operation
for Atlas 8620H, Atlas 6587 and Atlas 6657. It shows that Atlas 8620H can achieve high core
strength in small cross-sections, but the core strength quickly drops off as the cross-section gets
bigger. Atlas 6582 and Atlas 6657 have excellent hardenability response and can achieve high
core strength at larger diameters.
If a component is applied in an environment of high dynamic stresses and has to be able to

Tensile Strength for Case Hardening Steels

in core after case hardening at various diameters

Atlas 6657
63mm

Atlas 6587

Atlas 8620H

Atlas 6657
30mm

Atlas 6587

Atlas 8620H

Atlas 6657
11mm

Atlas 6587

Atlas 8620H

600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500

Tensile Strength (MPa)

25
 ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

withstand sudden impact and fluctuating stresses in various directions, the toughness of the steel
becomes a significant parameter. The toughness of the case-hardening steel is related to the ability
to withstand sudden high impact and to the level of fatigue strength.

The graph below shows the ductility of the core after the case-hardening operation for Atlas 8620H,
Atlas 6587 and Atlas 6657 in various diameters. It shows that Atlas 8620H and Atlas 6657
generally have a higher ductility than Atlas 6587.

If a high core strength is required and toughness also needs to be maximised, then Atlas 6657
needs to be considered. Atlas 6657 is a tougher steel than Atlas 6587 due to its higher nickel
content. The nickel content also increases the toughness of the case layer.

Core Ductility of Case Hardening Steels

after case hardening for various diameters

12

10

8
Elongation (%)

0
Atlas Atlas Atlas Atlas Atlas Atlas Atlas Atlas Atlas
8620H 6587 6657 8620H 6587 6657 8620H 6587 6657

11mm 30mm 63mm

26
3. PROPERTIES OF STEEL GRADES COMPARED 4. PRODUCT DATASHEETS
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

4.1 ATLAS M1020: CARBON STEEL BRIGHT BAR

Colour Code: Yellow
4.1.1 INTRODUCTION
Atlas M1020 carbon steel bar is a merchant grade plain carbon steel bar containing nominally
0.20% carbon. Atlas M1020 has wider chemical composition limits than grade 1020. Grade
M1020 is supplied based on it meeting specified chemical composition requirements only.

4.1.2 RELATED SPECIFICATIONS

Bar in grade M1020 is supplied in accordance with the requirements of AS1443 Grade M1020

4.1.3 CHEMICAL COMPOSITION

Specification values in %

C Si Mn P S
0.15-0.25 ≤ 0.35 0.30-0.90 ≤ 0.050 ≤ 0.050

4.1.4 CONDITIONS OF SUPPLY – TYPICAL MECHANICAL PROPERTIES

Atlas M1020 is not guaranteed to meet any specified minimum mechanical properties and the
values in the table below reflect typical properties only. These values reflect grade D3 (AS 1443)
for cold drawn sections and grade T3 (AS 1443) for turned and polished sections. Brinell Hardness
(HB) limits are not specified in AS 1443.

Tensile Yield Stress Elongation Hardness

Condition (mm) Diameter (mm)
Strength (MPa) (MPa) (% in 50mm) (HB)
Up to 16mm inclusive 480 min 380 min 12 min 142 min
Cold Drawn >16mm to 38mm inclusive 460 min 370 min 12 min 135 min
>38mm to 100mm inclusive 430 min 340 min 13 min 126 min
Cold Finished / To 50mm inclusive 410 min 250 min 22 min 119 min
Turned and Polished >50mm to 250mm inclusive 410 min 230 min 22 min 119 min

M1020 can be supplied as D3 or T3 (or equivalent) with guaranteed mechanical properties on

special order request.

4.1.5 CONDITIONS OF SUPPLY – FINISH, DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES

4.1.5.1 Surface Finish
Bright round bar up to 63.5mm diameter is all cold drawn. Bright round bars 63.5-100mm diameter
are cold drawn or smooth-turned and polished. Bright round bars over 100mm diameter are all
smooth-turned and polished. All hexagon bar and all square bar is cold drawn. Flat Bar is cold
drawn and supplied sharp-edged or round edged.

4.1.5.2 Diameter and A/F tolerances

Round Bar: Cold drawn h10; Smooth-turned and Polished h11 or h10, Ground h8
Square Bar: h11
Hex Bar: h11
Flat Bar: h11.

4.1.5.3 Straightness – maximum deviation from a straight line

Round Bar: 1 in 1000mm
Other tolerances may be supplied for more critical applications upon enquiry. 29
 ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

4.1.5.4 Length Tolerance

Mill Lengths (3.5 to 6.0m): ± 250mm max.
Set Lengths (3.0 to 7.0m): -0/+40mm max. tolerance is possible subject to enquiry
4.1.6 SURFACE HARDENING
The following temperature ranges are applicable for the respective heat treatment operations.

Annealing Normalising Carburising Tempering

870 – 910°C 890 – 940°C 880 – 980°C 150 – 200°C

Atlas M1020 is not a case-hardening steel, however, it may be case hardened by the blank
carburising process. It should be taken into account that Carbon content varies between 0.15% and
0.25%, therefore the result of the blank carburising process may greatly vary. If surface hardening
is critical then the test certificate should be checked. Atlas M1020 is not suitable for through-
hardening, flame or induction hardening due to the low carbon content of this steel.

4.1.7 WELDING
M1020 can be readily welded by all conventional welding processes, MIG, TIG, MMAW etc.
Pre or post heating is normally not necessary as part of the welding procedure. Preheat heavier
sections. Do not weld components after blank carburising.

4.1.8 APPLICATIONS OF ATLAS M1020

Suitable for general engineering applications where the lower strength of this grade is sufficient.
Grade M1020 is not able to be through-hardened and is not hardenable by either flame or induction
hardening processes. It can be case hardened by a blank carburising process. Applications such as
fasteners of various types, engineering applications where strength is not the major consideration
(shafts, jack handles, threaded bar) and a grade is required that can be readily welded.

4.1.9 POSSIBLE ALTERNATIVE GRADES

Grade Why it might be chosen instead of M1020

1214FM Where welding and bending are not required and improvement in machinability is required.

Where higher strength is required and welding and bending may be required. Pre and post heat may be
M1030
required as part of the welding procedure, whereas M1020 can be readily welded without pre & post heating.

Further increase in strength required above that of M1030, and the lower ductility and toughness of 1040/1045
1040/1045
can be tolerated. Welding of 1040 or 1045 requires pre & post heat as part of the weld procedure.

30
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

4.2 ATLAS M1030: CARBON STEEL BRIGHT BAR

Colour Code: White
4.2.1 INTRODUCTION
Atlas M1030 carbon bar is a merchant grade plain carbon steel product containing nominally 0.30%
carbon. Atlas M1030 is supplied based on it meeting specified chemical composition requirements
only.

4.2.2 RELATED SPECIFICATIONS

Bar in grade M1030 is supplied in accordance with the requirements of AS1443 Grade M1030.

4.2.3 CHEMICAL COMPOSITION

Specification values in %

C Si Mn P S
0.25-0.35 ≤ 0.35 0.30-0.90 ≤ 0.050 ≤ 0.050

4.2.4 CONDITIONS OF SUPPLY – TYPICAL MECHANICAL PROPERTIES

Atlas M1030 is not guaranteed to meet any specified minimum mechanical properties and the
values in the table below reflect typical properties only. These values reflect grade D4 (AS 1443)
for cold drawn sections and grade T4 (AS 1443) for turned and polished sections. Brinell Hardness
(HB) limits are not specified in AS 1443.

Tensile Strength Yield Stress Elongation (% in

Condition Diameter (mm) Hardness (HB)
(MPa) (MPa) 50mm)
Up to 16mm
560 min 440 min 10 min 164 min
inclusive

>16mm to 38mm
Cold Drawn 540 min 430 min 11 min 160 min
inclusive

>38mm to 100mm
520 min 410 min 12 min 154 min
inclusive
Hot Finished
or Turned All sizes to 260mm 500 min 250 min 20 min 147 min
and Polished

M1030 can be supplied as D4 or T4 (or equivalent) with guaranteed mechanical properties as

above on special order request.

4.2.5 CONDITIONS OF SUPPLY – FINISH, DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES

4.2.5.1 Surface Finish
Bright round bar up to 63.5mm diameter is all cold drawn. Bright round bars of 63.5-100mm
diameter are cold drawn or smooth-turned and polished. Bright round bars over 100mm diameter
are all smooth-turned and polished. All hexagonal bar and all square bar is cold drawn. Flat Bar is
cold drawn and supplied sharp-edged. As rolled (black) bars available upon enquiry.

4.2.5.2 Diameter and A/F tolerances

Round Bar: Drawn h10; Smooth-turned and polished h11 or h10; Ground h8
Square Bar: h11
Hex Bar: h11
Flat Bar: h11 31
 ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

4.2.5.3 Straightness – maximum deviation from a straight line

Round Bar: 1 in 500mm
Squares, Flats and Hexagon: 1 in 375mm
Other tolerances may be supplied for more critical applications upon enquiry.

4.2.5.4 Length Tolerance

Mill Lengths (3.5 to 6.0m): ± 250mm max.
Set Lengths (3.0 to 7.0m): -0/+40mm max. tolerance is possible subject to
enquiry

4.2.6 HEAT TREATMENT

The following temperature ranges are applicable for the respective heat treatment operations.

Annealing Normalising Quenching Quenching medium Tempering

850 - 900°C 870 - 920°C 850 - 890°C Water or Brine 550 - 660°C

The tempering temperature range in the table refers to tempering after quenching. For tempering
after a blank carburising process a temperature range of 150-250°C is appropriate.

4.2.7 SURFACE HARDENING

Atlas M1030 is not a dedicated case-hardening steel, nor is it a dedicated through-hardening steel.
If Carbon content is below 0.30% (check test certificate) it may be case hardened by the blank
carburising process, though this procedure is not generally recommended. If Carbon is above
0.30% (check test certificate) Atlas M1030 may be quenched and tempered although only a limited
and shallow (up to 5mm from surface) hardening response will be achieved.

4.2.8 WELDING
M1030 can be welded by all conventional welding processes, MIG, TIG, MMAW etc. Pre and
Post heating may be required as part of the welding process so as to avoid cracking, particularly
in heavier sectional sizes

4.2.9 APPLICATIONS OF ATLAS M1030

Grade M1030 is used in general engineering applications. It offers an improvement in tensile
strength and yield strength as compared to grade M1020 (when equivalent sectional sizes and
metallurgical condition are compared). Applications such as fasteners of various types, engineering
applications where strength is not the major consideration (shaft, threaded bar) and a grade is
required that can be welded.

4.2.10 POSSIBLE ALTERNATIVE GRADES

Grade Why it might be chosen instead of Atlas M1030

Where a lower tensile and yield strength grade is acceptable. Pre and Post heating can not be used but would
M1020
be required if M1030 is used.
Where lower strength is acceptable and welding and/or bending are not required. Substantial improvement in
1214
machinability required over that offered by either grades M1030 or M1020.
Further increase in strength required above that of M1030 and the lower ductility and toughness of 1045 can
1045 be tolerated. Pre and post heat recommended as part of the welding procedure if grade 1045 is used and it is
to be welded

32
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

4.3 ATLAS 1045: MEDIUM-TENSILE CARBON STEEL BAR

Colour Code: Jade Green
4.3.1 INTRODUCTION
Atlas 1045 is a fully killed plain carbon steel product containing nominally 0.45% carbon. This
grade was formerly designated as K1045. Atlas 1045 is supplied based on it meeting specified
chemical composition requirements only.

4.3.2 RELATED SPECIFICATIONS

Bar in grade 1045 is supplied in accordance with the requirements of JIS J4051 grade S45C and/
or AS1442 grade 1045 in the case of black bar, and AS1443 grade 1045 in the case of bright
(cold finished) bar.

4.3.3 CHEMICAL COMPOSITION

Specification values in %

C Si Mn P S
0.43-0.50 0.10 - 0.35 0.30-0.90 ≤ 0.040 ≤ 0.040

4.3.4 CONDITIONS OF SUPPLY – TYPICAL MECHANICAL PROPERTIES

Atlas 1045 is not guaranteed to meet any specified minimum mechanical properties and the values
in the table below reflect typical properties only. These values reflect grade D6 (AS 1443) for cold
drawn sections, grade T6 (AS 1443) for turned and polished and grade 6 (AS 1442) for rolled
(black) sections. Brinell Hardness (HB) is not specified in these standards.

Tensile Yield Stress Elongation

Condition Diameter (mm) Hardness (HB)
Strength (MPa) (MPa) (% in 50mm)
Up to 16mm inclusive 690 min 540 min 8 min 207 min

Cold Drawn >16mm to 38mm inclusive 650 min 510 min 8 min 195 min

>38mm to 80mm inclusive 640 min 500 min 9 min 190 min
As rolled/Turned
All sizes to 260mm 600 min 300 min 14 min 179 min
and Polished

Atlas 1045 Bright Bar can be supplied as D6 or T6 (or equivalent) with guaranteed mechanical
properties on special order request. Atlas 1045 Black Bar can be supplied in the normalised
condition with guaranteed mechanical properties on special order request.

4.3.5 CONDITIONS OF SUPPLY – FINISH, DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES

4.3.5.1 Finish
Atlas 1045 is stocked and supplied in three different surface finish classes:
as rolled/forged (black)
cold drawn or smooth-turned and polished
centreless ground
4.3.5.2 Diameter and A/F tolerances
Atlas 1045 black round bar is supplied with max. dimensional tolerance on diameter of ±1.5%
(min. 0.4mm).
Atlas 1045 cold drawn/turned round bar is supplied in tolerance h10 or h9. Atlas 1045 centreless
ground round bar is supplied in tolerance h8 or better.
Atlas 1045 square bar, hexagonal bar and flat bar are supplied in tolerance h11. 33
 ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

4.3.5.3 Straightness – maximum deviation from a straight line

As rolled (black) round bar: 3mm in 1000mm
Bright round bar: 2mm in 1000mm
Centreless ground: 0.3mm in 1000mm
Square, flat and hexagonal bar: 1mm in 375mm
Other tolerances may be supplied for more critical applications upon enquiry.

4.3.5.4 Length Tolerance for Bright Bars

Mill Lengths (3.5 to 6.0m): ± 250mm max.
Set Lengths (3.0 to 7.0m): -0/+100mm max, better tolerance subject to enquiry

4.3.6 MACHINING ALLOWANCES FOR ATLAS 1045 ROUND BAR (MM ON DIAMETER)
Bar diameter Black (hot rolled or forged) Bright (drawn or peeled bar)
(mm) Part length <120mm Part length >120mm Part length <120mm Part length >120mm
Up to 50 incl. 2.8mm 2.8 + 6mm/m 1.0mm 1.0 + 4mm/m
>50 to 100 incl. 4.5mm 4.5 + 6mm/m 1.0mm 1.0 + 4mm/m
>100 to 150 incl. 5.3mm 5.3 + 6mm/m 1.0mm 1.0 + 4mm/m
>150 to 200 incl. 9.0mm 9.0 + 6mm/m 1.5mm 1.5 + 4mm/m
>200 to 500 incl. - - 1.5mm 1.5 + 6mm/m

Hot-rolling surface defects are retained in cold drawing. For bright bar in the range of cold drawing
(up to 50mm) it is essential to take machining allowance into account. Peeled bar is generally free
of surface defects. A certain allowance for surface defects is recommended however, as minor
defects are permitted by the various national standards (AS, JIS, EN etc.).

4.3.7 HEAT TREATMENT

The following temperature ranges are applicable for the respective heat treatment operations.
Full Annealing Normalising Hardening Quenching medium Tempering
800 - 850°C 840 – 880°C 820 – 860°C Water or Oil 550 – 660°C

4.3.8 TYPICAL MECHANICAL PROPERTIES IN HEAT TREATED CONDITION

After quenching and tempering Atlas 1045 achieves typically the following mechanical properties.
Tensile Strength 0.2% proof Reduction of Impact 4.3.8.1
Diameter (mm) Elongation (% )
(MPa) stress (MPa) Area (% ) Charpy (J)
up to 40 incl 650 – 800 430 min 16 min 40 min 25 min
>40 to 100 incl 630 – 780 370 min 17 min 45 min 25 min
>100 to 250 incl 590 - 740 340 min 18 min - 22 min
>250 to 500 incl 590 - 740 320 min 17 min - 20 min

34
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

4.3.9 HARDENABILITY DIAGRAM

Hardenability of 1045
Typical Jominy Test Results

60
Rockwell Hardness (HRC)

50

40
max
min

30

20

10
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 13 15 20 25 30 40

distance from quenched end (mm)

4.3.10 SURFACE HARDENING

Atlas 1045 is suitable for induction hardening and flame hardening.

4.3.11 WELDING
Atlas 1045 can be welded by all conventional welding processes, MIG, TIG, MMAW etc. Pre and
Post heating (also in light sections) are required as part of the welding procedure so as to avoid
cracking.

4.3.12 APPLICATIONS OF ATLAS 1045

Grade 1045 is used in general engineering applications. This grade is used in engineering
applications where better strength that that offered by either M1020 or M1030 is a requirement.
Typical applications include hydraulic rams, shafts and medium to higher strength threaded fasteners.
Atlas 1045 is generally not recommended for critical applications, particularly those where high
strength is required in combination with ductility or toughness. For these application low-alloy steels
are generally recommended (or in certain cases micro-alloy steels).

4.3.13 POSSIBLE ALTERNATIVE GRADES

Grade Why it might be chosen instead of 1045

Where a lower tensile and yield strength grade is acceptable. If grade M1030 is used as an alternative then
M1030
pre and post heat would normally still need to be used, particularly in heavier sections.
Further increase in strength required, plus guaranteed tensile properties are a requirement. Better impact
properties are required. Higher core strength required. Welding of grade 4140 would not normally be
4140
recommended. In case of attempting to weld this grade guidance from an experienced and qualified welding
engineer must be sought.

35
 ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

4.4 ATLAS 1214FM: FREE MACHINING BRIGHT CARBON STEEL BAR

Colour Code: Rose Pink
4.4.1 INTRODUCTION
Atlas 1214FM is a free machining, resulphurised carbon steel bar containing nominally 0.14%
carbon. Atlas 1214FM has similar chemical composition as the grade 1214. Atlas 1214FM is
supplied based on it meeting specified chemical composition requirements only.

4.4.2 RELATED SPECIFICATIONS

Free machining bar Atlas 1214FM is supplied as per one of the following alternative standards.

AS1443 grade 1214,

ASTM A108 grade 1213 or grade 1215,

Euronorm EN 10087 grade 11SMn30 (1.0715) or grade 11SMn37 (1.0736).

4.4.3 CHEMICAL COMPOSITION

Specification values in %
Grade C Si Mn P S
AS 1214 ≤ 0.15 ≤ 0.10 0.80–1.20 0.04–0.09 0.25–0.35
ASTM 1213 ≤ 0.13 -- 0.70–1.00 0.07–0.12 0.24–0.33
ASTM 1215 ≤ 0.09 -- 0.75–1.05 0.07–0.12 0.26–0.35
11SMn30 ≤ 0.14 ≤ 0.05 0.90-1.30 ≤ 0.11 0.27-0.33
11SMn37 ≤ 0.14 ≤ 0.05 1.00-1.50 ≤ 0.11 0.34-0.40

The grades are characterised by high and consistent machinability and the ability to be electroplated.
Grades can be interchanged without problems and no marked changes are to be expected by the
user. Grade 11SMn37 has the highest machinability of these alternatives.

4.4.4 CONDITIONS OF SUPPLY – TYPICAL MECHANICAL PROPERTIES

Atlas 1214FM is not tensile tested therefore it is not guaranteed to meet any specified minimum
tensile property requirements. The mechanical properties stated below (except HB values) are
specified in AS1443 grade D12 (cold drawn) and AS1443 grade T12 (peeled and polished).
Grades D12 and T12 are grade 1214 with guaranteed mechanical properties.

Tensile Yield Elongation Hardness

Condition Diameter (mm)
Strength (MPa) Stress (MPa) (% in 50mm) (HB)

Up to 16mm inclusive 480 min 350 min 7 min 142 – 226

Cold Drawn >16mm to 38mm inclusive 430 min 330 min 8 min 126 – 210

>38mm to 100mm inclusive 400 min 290 min 9 min 119 – 200

Cold Finished/
To 260mm inclusive 370 min 230 min 17 min 105 - 154
Turned and polished

Atlas 1214FM can be supplied with guaranteed mechanical properties on special order request.

36
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

4.4.5 CONDITIONS OF SUPPLY – FINISH, DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES

4.4.5.1 Surface Finish
Bright round bar up to 63.5mm diameter is all cold drawn. Bright round bars 63.5-100mm diameter
are cold drawn or smooth-turned and polished. Bright round bars over 100mm diameter are all
smooth-turned and polished.

All hexagon bar and all square bar is cold drawn. Flat Bar is cold drawn and supplied sharp-
edged.

4.4.5.2 Diameter and A/F tolerances

Round Bar: Drawn h10; Smooth-turned and polished h11 or h10;
Square Bar: h11; Hex Bar; h11; Flat Bar: h11.
4.4.5.3 Straightness – maximum deviation from a straight line
Round Bar: 1 in 1000mm
Squares, Flats and Hexagon: 1 in 375mm
Other tolerances may be supplied for more critical applications upon enquiry.

4.4.5.4 Length Tolerance Bright Bar

Mill Lengths (3.5 to 6.0m): ± 250mm max.
Set Lengths (3.0 to 7.0m): -0/+40mm max. tolerance is possible subject to enquiry
4.4.6 WELDING
Atlas 1214 can be welded by all conventional welding processes, MIG, TIG, MMAW etc, however
this grade is rich in manganese sulphide inclusions and when welded a low strength poor quality
weld normally results. Unless such a weld can be tolerated in the intended application, then welding
of this grade should not be attempted.

4.4.7 APPLICATIONS OF ATLAS 1214FM

General repetition engineering applications where the lower strength and ductility are acceptable.
Atlas 1214FM cannot be through hardened and is not hardenable by either flame or induction
hardening processes. It can be case hardened by a blank carburising process. Typical applications
are domestic bin axles, concrete anchors, padlock shackles (case hardened), hydraulic fittings.
1214FM has low ductility, so it is unsuitable for applications requiring extensive bending or
forming.

4.4.8 POSSIBLE ALTERNATIVE GRADES

Grade Why it might be chosen instead of 1214FM
12L14FM might be used where better tool life and a slight improvement in machinability over that of grade
12L14FM
1214FM is a requirement.
Where welding and/or bending are required and machinability is a secondary requirement. Also where the
M1020 finally machined components are to be electroplated and a better quality plated finish is a requirement. Where
higher ductility is needed than offered by 1214FM because of significant bending or forming operations.
Where higher strength is required and welding and bending may be required. Pre and post heat may be
M1030
required as part of the welding procedure for M1030.

37
 ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

4.5 ATLAS 12L14FM: FREE MACHINING STEEL BRIGHT CARBON BAR

Colour Code: Violet
4.5.1 INTRODUCTION
Atlas 12L14FM is a free machining carbon steel bar containing maximum 0.15% Carbon. Due to
the addition of Lead (Pb) this grade has the highest machinability and is suitable for high-volume
ultra-high speed machining.

4.5.2 RELATED SPECIFICATIONS

Free machining bar Atlas 12L14FM is supplied as per the following alternative standards.

• AS1443 grade 12L14, ASTM A108 grade 12L14,

• Euronorm EN 10087 grade 11SMnPb37 (1.0737).

4.5.3 CHEMICAL COMPOSITION

Specification values in %

Grade C Si Mn P S Pb

12L14 ≤ 0.15 ≤ 0.10 0.80–1.20 0.04–0.09 0.25–0.35 0.15-0.35

11SMnPb37 ≤ 0.14 ≤ 0.05 1.00-1.50 ≤ 0.11 0.34-0.40 0.20-0.35

The grades are equally characterised by very high and consistent machinability and the ability
to be electroplated. Grades can be interchanged without problems and no marked changes in
machinability are to be expected.

4.5.4 CONDITIONS OF SUPPLY – TYPICAL MECHANICAL PROPERTIES

Atlas 12L14FM is not guaranteed to meet any specified minimum tensile property requirements.
The values in the table below reflect typical properties only. These mechanical properties (except
for HB values) are specified in AS1443 grade D13 (cold drawn) and AS1443 grade T13 (peeled
and polished). Grades D13 and T13 are essentially grade 12L14FM with guaranteed mechanical
properties.

Tensile Yield Elongation Hardness

Condition Diameter (mm)
Strength (MPa) Stress (MPa) (% in 50mm) (HB)
Up to 16mm inclusive 480 min 350 min 7 min 142 – 226
Cold Drawn >16mm to 38mm inclusive 430 min 330 min 8 min 126 – 210
>38mm to 100mm inclusive 400 min 290 min 9 min 119 – 200
Cold Finished/
To 260mm inclusive 370 min 230 min 17 min 105 - 154
Turned and polished

Atlas 12L14FM can be supplied with guaranteed mechanical properties on special order request.

4.5.5 CONDITIONS OF SUPPLY – FINISH, DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES

4.5.5.1 Surface Finish
Bright round bar up to 63.5mm diameter is all cold drawn. Bright round bars of 63.5-100mm
diameter are cold drawn or smooth-turned and polished. Bright round bars over 100mm diameter
are all smooth-turned and polished.
All hexagon bar and all square bar is cold drawn. Flat Bar is cold drawn and supplied
sharp-edged.
38
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

4.5.5.2 Diameter and A/F tolerances

Round Bar: Drawn h10; Smooth-turned and polished h10 or h11;
Square Bar: h11; Hex Bar: h11; Flat Bar: h11.

4.5.5.3 Straightness – maximum deviation from a straight line

Round Bar: 1 in 1000mm
Squares, Flats and Hexagon: 1 in 375mm
Other tolerances may be supplied for more critical applications upon enquiry.

4.5.5.4 Length Tolerance

Mill Lengths (3.5 to 6.0m): ± 250mm max.
Set Lengths (3.0 to 7.0m): -0/+40mm max. tolerance is possible subject to enquiry

4.5.6 WELDING
Atlas 12L14FM is not suitable for any welding. Lead fumes originating during the welding operation
constitute a health hazard.

4.5.7 APPLICATIONS OF ATLAS 12L14FM

General repetition engineering applications where the lower strength of this product is acceptable.
Atlas 12L14FM is not capable of being through hardened and is not hardenable by either flame or
induction hardening processes. It can be case hardened by a blank carburising process. Applications
such as domestic bin axles, concrete anchors, padlock shackles (case hardened), hydraulic fittings,
vice jaws (case hardened). Ductility of Atlas 12L14FM is low, so it is not suitable for applications
requiring significant bending or forming.

4.5.8 POSSIBLE ALTERNATIVE GRADES

Grade Why it might be chosen instead of Atlas 12L14FM
Atlas Slightly lower machinability than 12L14FM. Recommended in case the use of leaded steels is a factor of
1214FM concern, such as in welding or general environmental concern.
Where welding is required and machinability is a secondary requirement. Also where the finally machined
M1020 components are to be electroplated and a better quality plated finish is a requirement. Where higher ductility is
required because of significant bending and forming.
Where higher strength is required and welding and bending may be required. Pre and post heat may be
M1030
required as part of the welding procedure, whereas M1020 is readily welded without pre & post heating.

39
 ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

4.6 ATLAS 4140: THROUGH-HARDENING LOW ALLOY STEEL BAR

Colour Coding: Jade (band) - Bluebell
4.6.1 INTRODUCTION
Atlas 4140 is a Chromium-Molybdenum through-hardening steel of medium hardenability. It is a
general purpose high-tensile steel with medium strength level and good impact properties.

4.6.2 RELATED SPECIFICATIONS

Material stocked by Atlas complies with grade AS1444 Grade 4140 and/or ASTM A434 (A29)
Grade 4140 and/or Euronorm EN 10083 grade 42CrMo4 (Material Number 1.7225/17227).

4.6.3 CHEMICAL COMPOSITION

Specification values in %

C Si Mn P S Cr Mo Ni
0.37-0.44 0.10-0.35 0.65-1.10 ≤ 0.040 ≤ 0.040 0.75-1.20 0.15-0.30 --

4.6.4 CONDITIONS OF SUPPLY – MECHANICAL PROPERTIES

Atlas 4140 is supplied in the hardened and tempered condition. The level of hardness is selected
to give useful strength while still maintaining the ability to machine the material into finished
components.

Tensile 0.2% proof Elongation

Diameter Heat Treated Impact Hardness
Strength stress (% in
(mm) Condition Izod (J) or Charpy (J) (HB)
(MPa) (MPa) 50mm)
up to 180 incl AS1444 Condition U 930 – 1080 740 min 12 min 47 min 42 min 269 - 331
>180 to 250 incl AS1444 Condition T 850 – 1000 665 min 13 min 54 min 50 min 248 – 302
>250 to 450 incl AS1444 Condition T 850 – 1000 665 min 13 min not guaranteed 248 – 302

Atlas 4140 can be re-heat-treated to higher strength or tempered back to lower strength levels than
those supplied as standard. Assistance with heat treatment should be sought from reputable heat
treatment companies

4.6.5 CONDITIONS OF SUPPLY – SURFACE FINISH AND MACHINING ALLOWANCE

Atlas 4140 Black is supplied with +/– tolerances according to DIN 1013 or better. Atlas 4140 Bright
is supplied cold drawn with h10 tolerance for bar diameters up to 25mm; bars with diameters 25
to 75mm are supplied as cold drawn with h10 tolerance or peeled with k12 tolerance, diameters
75-220mm are supplied peeled to k12, sizes over 210mm are supplied peeled to -0/+2mm.

4.6.6 MACHINING ALLOWANCES FOR ATLAS 4140 ROUND BAR (MM ON DIAMETER)

Black (hot rolled or forged) Bright (drawn or peeled bar)

Bar diameter (mm)
part length <120mm part length >120mm part length <120mm part length >120mm
0-50 1.5mm 1.5 + 6mm/m 1.0mm 1.0 + 4mm/m
50-100 2.3mm 2.3 + 6mm/m 1.0mm 1.0 + 4mm/m
100-150 4.5mm 4.5 + 6mm/m 1.0mm 1.0 + 4mm/m
150-210 6.5mm 6.5 + 6mm/m 1.5mm 1.5 + 4mm/m
210-450 - - 1.5mm 1.5 + 6mm/m

Hot-rolling surface defects are retained in cold drawing. For bright bar in the range of cold drawing
(up to 50mm) it is essential to take machining allowance into account. Peeled bar is generally free
of surface defects. A certain allowance for surface defects is recommended however, as minor
40 defects are permitted by the various national standards (AS, EN, etc.).
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

4.6.7 HEAT TREATMENT

Annealing Normalising Hardening Quenching medium Tempering
850°C 850 – 920°C 850 – 860°C Oil 500 – 680°C

Hardening
Tempering Diagram 4140 Components should be heated
typical values for 30mm section slowly to 850 to 860°C, held
100 until uniform, then quenched
vigorously in oil (or polymer
Tensile Izod with an equivalent quench
1600 Strength impact 90 rate to between 80 to 110°C).
Polymer quenchants have
Tensile Strength and 0.2% Proof Stress (MPa)

similar cooling capacities to oil,

Elongation (A%), Reduction of Area (Z%)

80
while having the advantage of
1400 a being less likely to ignite.
70
Tempering
Proof While still warm, re-heat
Stress

and Izod Impact (J)

Reduction 60 to tempering temperature,
of Area hold one hour per 25mm of
1200
50
section (2 hours minimum) and
cool in air. Select tempering
temperatures according to the
40 required mechanical properties
1000 (refer to tempering curve).
30
Holding in the temperature
range 230 to 370°C should
be avoided due to possible
20 temper embrittlement (“Blue
800
Brittleness”). For yield strengths
above 1380MPa: temper 1/2
10 to 2 hours at between 175 and
Elongation
230°C, while for yield strengths
600 0 below 1380MPa temper in
400 500 600 700 the temperature range 500 to
680°C, then air cool or water
Tempering Temp (˚ C) quench.

4.6.8 SURFACE HARDENING

Nitriding: Nitride at approximately 510°C for 10 to 60 hours, depending upon required case
depth. Surface hardness achievable is 600 to 650HV.
Induction or Flame Hardening: Atlas 4140 can be surface hardened to 58HRC (typical value).

4.6.9 WELDING
Welding is not recommended because of the likelihood of quench cracking occurring. If welding
must be carried out, pre-heat to 200 to 300°C and maintain this while welding. Immediately after
welding stress relieve at 500 to 600°C.

41
 ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

4.6.10 APPLICATIONS OF ATLAS 4140

Medium-high stressed shafts and components where the use of carbon steel 1045 would not be
appropriate. Reasons for using 4140 are the higher yield and fatigue strength, better through
hardening of the material and superior impact properties compared to plain carbon steels like
1045. These advantages are only achieved when 4140 is used in the heat treated condition.
Typical components include transmission shafts, spindles and small gears, threaded fasteners such
as bolts, nuts and studs.

4.6.11 HARDENABILITY DIAGRAM

Hardenability of 4140
Typical values according to AS 1444

65

60
Rockwell Hardness (HRC)

55

50

45 max
min
40

35

30

25
0 1.5 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50

distance from quenched end (mm)

4.6.12 POSSIBLE ALTERNATIVE GRADES

Grade Why it might be chosen instead of Atlas 4140
Atlas 6582 Higher core strength required, especially in sections larger than 100mm. These grades also have better
or 4340 impact properties and ductility (in all sections).

42
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

4.7 ATLAS 6582: THROUGH – HARDENING LOW ALLOY STEEL BAR

Colour coding: Jade (band) – Rose Pink
4.7.1 INTRODUCTION
Atlas 6582 alloy bar is a high performance through-hardening steel that offers high yield and
tensile strength after heat treatment whilst maintaining good toughness and ductility. This product
is a close equivalent to ASTM 4340 and outperforms 4340 in its through-hardening and impact
properties.

4.7.2 RELATED SPECIFICATIONS

Atlas 6582 low-alloy steel bar complies with grade 34CrNiMo6 (Euronorm EN 10083) described
under Material Number 1.6582.

4.7.3 CHEMICAL COMPOSITION

Specification values in %

C Si Mn P S Cr Ni Mo
0.30-0.38 ≤ 0.40 0.50-0.80 ≤ 0.035 ≤ 0.035 1.30-1.70 1.30-1.70 0.15-0.30

4.7.4 CONDITIONS OF SUPPLY – MECHANICAL PROPERTIES

Normally supplied in the quenched and tempered condition, with strength levels varying according
to diameter in order to optimise the strength-toughness balance.
Approx.
Diameter Tensile Strength 0.2% proof Elongation Reduction of Impact value
mechanical
(mm) (MPa min) stress (MPa) (A%) area (Z%) (ISO-V) (J) KV
Condition
≤ 40 1100 – 1300 W/X 900 min 10 min 45 min 45 min
> 40 ≤ 100 1000 – 1200 V/W 800 min 11 min 50 min 45 min
> 100 ≤ 160 900 – 1100 U/V 700 min 12 min 55 min 45 min
> 160 ≤ 250 800 – 950 T 600 min 13 min 55 min 45 min
> 250 ≤ 500 750 – 900 S 540 min 14 min -- 45 min

The third column in the table above shows the mechanical properties of Atlas 6582 and the closest
mechanical properties designation according to AS 1444-1996 for reference purposes.
4.7.5 CONDITIONS OF SUPPLY – TOLERANCES AND INSPECTION
Atlas 6582 is supplied hot rolled (black) or cold finished in the as heat treated condition.
Atlas 6582 Black is supplied with very tight tolerances in order to reduce machining allowances to
a minimum. Dimensional tolerance better than 1/2 DIN 1013 (up to 210mm, DIN 1013 for sizes
over 210mm). Depth of surface defects max. 0.50mm (all sizes). Out of straightness tolerance: 40
- 100mm diameter 2mm/m; 100 - 210mm diameter 2.5mm/m.
Atlas 6582 Bright is supplied cold drawn with tolerance h10 for sizes up to 25mm. Bars with
diameters 25 to 75mm are supplied cold drawn to h10 or peeled to k12. Bar diameters 76mm to
210mm are supplied peeled to k12 and sizes over 210mm are peeled to a -0/+2mm tolerance.

43
 ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

4.7.6 MACHINING ALLOWANCES FOR ATLAS 6582 ROUND BAR (MM ON DIAMETER)
Black (hot rolled or forged) Bright (drawn or peeled bar)
Bar diameter (mm)
part length <120mm part length >120mm part length <120mm part length <120mm
≤ 50 1.4mm 1.4 + 4mm/m 1.0mm 1.0 + 4mm/m
> 50 ≤ 100 1.7mm 1.7 + 4mm/m 1.0mm 1.0 + 4mm/m
> 100 ≤ 160 2.0mm 2.0 + 5mm/m 1.0mm 1.0 + 4mm/m
> 160 ≤ 210 2.3mm 2.3 + 5mm/m 1.5mm 1.5 + 4mm/m
> 210 ≤ 450 - - 1.5mm 1.5 + 6mm/m

e.g. an Atlas 6582 Black 180mm diameter bar with a length of 500mm requires a machining
allowance of 2.3mm + 0.5x5mm = 4.8mm and therefore cleans up to 175.2mm.
All bars have been subject to ultrasonic inspection (to AS1065 level 2).
4.7.7 APPLICATIONS
Parts exposed to high permanent or fluctuating stresses. Applications where excellent fatigue and
toughness properties of the material are required. Typical components include gears, planetary
gears, pinions, crankshafts, eccentric shafts, axles, bushes and sleeves.

4.7.8 HEAT TREATMENT

Normalising Hardening Quenching medium Tempering
850 – 880°C 830 – 860°C Oil 540 – 660°C

4.7.9 TEMPERING DIAGRAM

Tempering Diagram 34CrNiMo6

(1.6582)
typical values for 60mm section
1600 80

Tensile
Strength
70
Tensile Strength and 0.2% Proof Stress (MPa)

Reduction
Elongation (A%), Reduction of Area (Z%)

1400
of Area
60

Proof 50
1200
Stress

40

1000
30

20
800

Elongation 10

600 0
400 500 600 700

Tempering Temp (˚C)

44
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

4.7.10 WELDING
Welding is not recommended because of the high hardenability of this steel and hence the likelihood
of embrittlement in the heat affected zone and connected danger of quench cracking. If welding
must be carried out, pre-heat to 200 to 300°C and maintain this while welding. Immediately after
welding stress relieve at 550 to 650°C.

4.7.11 HARDENABILITY DIAGRAM

Hardenability of 34CrNimo6 (1.6582)

Jominy Test requirement according to EN 10083

65

60
Rockwell Hardness (HRC)

55
max
min
50

45

40
0 1.5 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50

distance from quenched end (mm)

4.7.12 POSSIBLE ALTERNATIVE GRADES

Grade Why it might be chosen instead of Atlas 6582
Similar strength properties as Atlas 6582. Through-hardening response in larger sections not as good as that of
Atlas 4340
Atlas 6582. Impact properties of Atlas 6582 are superior to 4340.
Lower cost and good availability in a range of sizes. However, in general significantly lower impact properties
Atlas 4140 characteristically apply when heat-treated to similar strength levels as Atlas 6582. Through-hardening response
substantially lower in large sections than Atlas 6582.
Higher yield strength and fatigue achievable, especially in larger sections, when heat treated to similar impact
Atlas 6580
properties as 6582. Higher toughness is also achieved in Atlas 6580.

45
 ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

4.8 ATLAS 4340: THROUGH-HARDENING LOW ALLOY STEEL BAR

Colour Coding: Jade (band) - Marigold
4.8.1 INTRODUCTION
Atlas 4340 is a nominally 1.8 percent Nickel Chromium Molybdenum low alloy steel of high
hardenability, with high strength and toughness in relatively large sections achieved with a “quench-
and-temper” heat treatment. A contemporary alternative to 4340 is Atlas 6582 through-hardening
steel that has improved through-hardening characteristics and offers superior impact properties to
4340 at equivalent strength levels.

4.8.2 RELATED SPECIFICATIONS

Atlas 4340 low-alloy steel bar complies with grade AS1444, Grade 4340 and/or ASTM
A434(A29) Grade 4340. Atlas 4340 is an alternative to Atlas 6582 through-hardening steel and
to JIS SCNM447.

4.8.3 CHEMICAL COMPOSITION

Specification values in %
C Si Mn P S Cr Mo Ni
0.37-0.44 0.10-0.35 0.55-0.90 ≤ 0.040 ≤ 0.040 0.65-0.95 0.20-0.35 1.55-2.00

4.8.4 CONDITIONS OF SUPPLY – MECHANICAL PROPERTIES

Atlas 4340 is supplied in the hardened and tempered condition. The level of hardness is selected to give
useful strength while still maintaining the ability to machine the material into finished components.
Tensile Strength Approx. Mechanical 0.2% proof Impact value
Diameter (mm) Elongation (A%)
(MPa) condition AS1444 stress (MPa) Charpy (J)
≤ 60 1000 – 1150 V 835 min 12 min 42 min
> 60 ≤ 100 930 – 1080 U 740 min 12 min 42 min
> 100 ≤ 178 930 – 1080 U 720 min 14 min 50 min
> 178 ≤ 240 900 – 1000 T 690 min 14 min 35 min

The third column in the table above shows the mechanical properties of Atlas 4340 and the closest
mechanical properties designation according to AS 1444-1996 for reference purposes.

4.8.5 CONDITIONS OF SUPPLY – SURFACE FINISH AND MACHINING ALLOWANCE

Atlas 4340 Black is supplied with +/– tolerance according to DIN 1013 or better. Atlas 4340 Bright
is supplied cold drawn with h10 tolerance for bars up to 25mm diameter. Bars with diameters 25 to
75mm are supplied cold drawn to h10 or peeled to k12. Bars 75 to 210mm are supplied peeled
to k12 and sizes over 210mm are peeled to a -0/+2mm tolerance.

4.8.6 MACHINING ALLOWANCES FOR ATLAS 4340 ROUND BAR (MM ON DIAMETER)
Black (hot rolled or forged) Bright (drawn or peeled bar)
Bar diameter (mm)
part length <120mm part length >120mm part length <120mm part length >120mm
0-50 1.5mm 1.5 + 6mm/m 1.0mm 1.0 + 4mm/m
50-100 2.3mm 2.3 + 6mm/m 1.0mm 1.0 + 4mm/m
100-150 4.5mm 4.5 + 6mm/m 1.0mm 1.0 + 4mm/m
150-210 6.5mm 6.5 + 6mm/m 1.5mm 1.5 + 4mm/m
210-450 - - 1.5mm 1.5 + 6mm/m

Hot-rolling surface defects are retained in cold drawing. For bright bar in the range of cold drawing
(up to 50mm) it is essential to take machining allowance into account. Peeled bar is generally free
of surface defects. A certain allowance for surface defects is recommended however, as minor
defects are permitted by the various national standards (AS, EN, etc.).

46
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

4.8.7 HEAT TREATMENT

Annealing Normalising Hardening Quenching medium Tempering
850°C 850 – 920°C 850 – 860°C Oil 450 – 650°C

HARDENING
Heat components slowly to
850°C, hold until uniform then
Tempering Diagram 4340
typical values for 30mm section
quench vigorously in oil (or
polymer with an equivalent
100
quench rate) to between 80

Elongation (A%), Reduction of Area (Z%) and Izod Impact (J)

Izod
impact and 110°C.
1600 90
Tensile TEMPERING
Strength While still warm, re-heat to
80 450 to 650°C, hold one hour
per 25mm of section (2 hours
1400 minimum) and cool in air.
70
Select tempering temperatures
according to the required
Tensile Strength (MPa)

60 mechanical properties – refer

1200
Reduction to tempering curve.
of Area
50 STRESS RELIEVING
For pre-hardened steel stress
relieving is achieved by
40 heating to between 500 to
1000
550°C. Re-treated bars or
30 forgings heat to 25°C below
tempering temperature.
Annealed components, heat
20
800 to 600 to 650°C. Hold in this
temperature range for 1 to 2
Elongation
10 hours, furnace cool to 450°C,
then air cool.
600 0
400 500 600 700

Tempering Temp (˚C)

4.8.8 SURFACE HARDENING

Nitriding: Nitride at approximately 510°C for 10 to 60 hours, depending upon required case.
Surface hardness achievable is 600 to 650HV.
Induction or Flame Hardening: Atlas 4340 can be surface hardened to 58HRC (water quench) or
surface hardened to between 53 to 55HRC (oil quench). Tempering at 200°C.
4.8.9 WELDING
Welding is not recommended because of the danger of quench cracking. If welding must be
carried out, pre-heat to 200 to 300°C and maintain this while welding. Immediately after welding
stress relieve at 550 to 650°C.
4.8.10 APPLICATIONS OF ATLAS 4340
Parts exposed to high permanent and fluctuating stresses. Applications where excellent fatigue and
toughness properties of the material are required. Typical components include gears, planetary
gears, axles, pinions, shafts, bushes and sleeves. 47
 ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

4.8.11 HARDENABILITY DIAGRAM

Hardenability of 4340
Typical Jominy Test Results according to AS 1444
65

60
Rockwell Hardness (HRC)

55

max
min
50

45

40
0 1.5 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 20 25 30 35 40 45

distance from quenched end (mm)

4.8.12 POSSIBLE ALTERNATIVE GRADES

Grade Why it might be chosen instead of Atlas 4340
Lower cost and better availability in a range of sizes. However, in general slightly lower impact properties
Atlas 4140
achieved when heat-treated to similar strength levels as 4340.
Atlas 6582 Superior impact properties and through-hardening when heat-treated to similar strength levels as 4340.
Substantially higher yield strength achievable, especially in larger sections, when heat treated to similar impact
Atlas 6580
properties as 4340. Higher toughness is also achieved in Atlas 6580.

48
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

4.9 ATLAS 6580: THROUGH – HARDENING LOW ALLOY STEEL BAR

Colour code: Jade (band) - Lime
4.9.1 INTRODUCTION
Atlas 6580 alloy bar is the ultimate through-hardening steel that offers exceptional yield and tensile
strengths whilst maintaining good toughness and ductility. The grade is a contemporary alternative
to En25 and En26 is and outperforms these grades in terms of achievable strength, hardenability
and toughness-strength ratio. It enjoys increasing popularity due to its versatility and its price/
performance ratio.
4.9.2 RELATED SPECIFICATIONS
Atlas 6580 alloy bar complies with grade 30CrNiMo8 (Euronorm EN 10083) described under
Material Number 1.6580.
4.9.3 CHEMICAL COMPOSITION
Specification values in %
C Si Mn P S Cr Ni Mo
0.26-0.34 ≤ 0.40 0.30-0.60 ≤ 0.035 ≤ 0.035 1.80-2.20 1.80-2.20 0.30-0.50

4.9.4 CONDITIONS OF SUPPLY – MECHANICAL PROPERTIES

Normally supplied in the quenched and tempered condition, with strength levels varying according
to diameter in order to optimise the strength-toughness balance.
Tensile Approx.
Diameter 0.2% proof Elongation Reduction of Impact value
Strength mechanical
(mm) stress (MPa) (A%) area (Z%) (ISO-V) (J) KV
(MPa) condition
≤ 40 1300 – 1450 Y 1100 min 9 min 40 min 30 min
> 40 ≤ 100 1200 – 1300 X 1020 min 10 min 45 min 35 min
> 100 ≤ 160 1100 – 1200 W 925 min 11 min 50 min 45 min
> 160 ≤ 250 1000 – 1100 V 820 min 12 min 50 min 45 min
> 250 ≤ 500 900 - 1000 U 700 min 12 min -- 45 min

The third column in the table above shows the mechanical properties of Atlas 6580 and the closest
mechanical properties designation according to AS 1444-1996 for reference purposes.

4.9.5 CONDITIONS OF SUPPLY – TOLERANCES AND INSPECTION

Atlas 6580 is supplied hot rolled or forged (black) in the as heat treated condition. The product is
supplied with very tight tolerances in order to reduce machining allowances to a minimum.
Dimensional tolerance better than 2
/1 DIN 1013 (up to 210mm). Depth of surface defects max. 0.50mm
(up to 210mm).
Out of straightness tolerance: 40 - 100mm diameter 2mm/m; 100 - 210mm diameter 2.5mm/m.
Bars over 210mm diameter are supplied peeled to -0/+2mm tolerance.
All bars have been subject to ultrasonic inspection according to AS1065 level 2.

4.9.6 MACHINING ALLOWANCE CHART

Machining Allowance (mm on total diameter)
Bar diameter (mm)
Part length <120mm Part length >120mm
≤ 50 1.4mm 1.4 + 4mm/m
> 50 ≤ 100 1.7mm 1.7 + 4mm/m
> 100 ≤ 160 2.0mm 2.0 + 5mm/m
> 160 ≤ 210 2.3mm 2.3 + 5mm/m

e.g. a 180mm diameter bar with a length of 500mm requires a machining allowance of
2.3mm+0.5x5mm = 4.8mm and therefore cleans up to 175.2mm. 49
 ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

4.9.7 HEAT TREATMENT

Normalising Hardening Quenching medium Tempering
850 – 880°C 830 – 860°C Oil 540 – 660°C

4.9.8 HARDENABILITY DIAGRAM

Hardness Limits for Jominy test

EN 10083 for 30CrNiMo8 (1.6580)
58

56

54
Rockwell Hardness (HRC)

52

50
max
48 min

46

44

42

40
0 1.5 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
distance from quenched end (mm)

4.9.9 WELDING
Welding Atlas 6580 would normally be avoided as this grade has a very high hardenability and
therefore embrittlement in the heat affected zone will occur. If welding is unavoidable pre-heat to
between 200 to 300°C, maintain this temperature during the welding operation and stress relieve
at 550 to 600°C immediately after welding.

50
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

4.9.10 TEMPERING DIAGRAM

Tempering Diagram 30CrNiMo8 (1.6580)

typical values for 60mm section
1500 60

Tensile
1400
Strength

Reduction 50
of Area
Tensile Strengthand 0.2% Proof Stress (MPa)

1300

Elongation (A%), Reduction of Area (Z%)

1200 40

Proof
1100 Stress
30

1000

900 20

800

Elongation 10

700

600 0
500 550 600 650
Tempering Temp (˚C)

4.9.11 APPLICATIONS
Parts exposed to highest dynamic stresses. Applications where excellent fatigue properties of the
material are required. Typical components include gears, planetary gears, drive pinions, shafts,
bushes and sleeves. Bars with diameters up to 40mm have hardness of 44/45 HRC in the rim area
and given the high toughness of the material Atlas 6580 will perform well in applications where
currently induction hardened components in grades 4140 or 4340 are being used.

51
 ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

4.10 ATLAS 8620H: CASE–HARDENING STEEL BAR

Colour Code: Red (Band) - White
4.10.1 INTRODUCTION
Atlas 8620H is a low Nickel Chromium Molybdenum case-hardening steel of medium hardenability
used principally for relatively lightly stressed components. Atlas 8620H can be carburised and
subsequently hardened by a quenching and tempering operation. The “H” designation of 8620H
indicates guaranteed hardenability according to the hardenability diagram on the following page.

4.10.2 RELATED SPECIFICATIONS

Atlas 8620H complies with AS1444 Grade 8620H and/or ASTM A29 Grade 8620. Alternatively
Atlas 8620H can be supplied as Euronorm grade 20NiCrMo2-2+HH (Material Number
1.6523/1.6526 under EN 10084).

4.10.3 CHEMICAL COMPOSITION

Specification values in %
Grade C Si Mn P S Cr Ni Mo
8620H 0.17-0.23 0.10-0.35 0.60-0.95 ≤ 0.040 ≤ 0.040 0.35-0.65 0.35-0.75 0.15-0.25
1.6523 0.17-0.23 ≤ 0.40 0.65-0.95 ≤ 0.035 ≤ 0.035 0.35-0.70 0.40-0.70 0.15-0.25

4.10.4 CONDITIONS OF SUPPLY

Normally supplied in the annealed condition with hardness max 212 HB, with typical hardness being
in the range 170-200 HB. Bars are cold finished (peeled) and supplied to k12 tolerance for all bar
diameters. All bars are ultrasonically inspected to AS1065 level 2.

4.10.5 HEAT TREATMENTS

Treatment Temperature Range (°C) Cooling
Oil (water), hot quench 160-250°C,
Carburising 880 - 960
Salt bath 580-650°C, Case-hardening box, Air*
Intermediate annealing 630 - 650 Air, Furnace
Core hardening 860 – 900 Oil (water), hot quench 160-250°C*
Case hardening 780 – 820 Oil (water), hot quench 160-250°C*
Tempering 150 - 200 Air

* the choice of cooling medium depends on the desired final properties and geometry of the section
to be case hardened and the effect of the cooling medium, given the hardenability of the steel.

After final machining, heat in carburising atmosphere (blank carburise) to 880 to 960°C and hold for
sufficient time at temperature to produce the required case depth. The time at temperature during the
blank carburising process determines the depth of case achieved.
After completion of blank carburisation treatment, re-heat to 860-900°C, hold until uniform and then
quench in oil as rapidly as practical.
A refining treatment is necessary to improve the structure of the case and its hardness. Heat slowly to
780-820°C, hold until uniform and then quench in oil.
Single quench treatment may also be possible where components are quenched directly from 820
to 840°C.
Minimum tempering time is 1 hour, but a tempering period of 1 hour per 25mm of section is
recommended. If the steel is to be direct hardened, in general, a carburising temperature of 950°C
should not be exceeded. After case hardening a typical case hardness of 61 HRC can be achieved.
52
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

4.10.6 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES AFTER CASE HARDENING

The following table shows the typical mechanical properties achievable in the core of a test section
after carburizing, hardening and tempering.

Yield Strength Tensile Strength Impact Value DVM

Diameter (mm) Elongation (A%)
(MPa) (MPa) (J)
11 785 min 980 – 1270 9 min 41 min
30 590 min 780 – 1080 10 min 41 min
63 490 min 690 – 930 11 min --

4.10.7 HARDENABILITY DIAGRAM

Hardness Limits for Jominy test Hardness Limits for Jominy test
EN 10084 for 20NiCrMo2-2 HH (1.6523) AS 1444 requirement for 8620H
50 50

45 45

Rockwell Hardness (HRC)

Rockwell Hardness (HRC)

40 40

35 35
max max
min min
30 30

25 25

20 20

15 15
0 1.5 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 20 25 30 35 40 0 1.5 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 20 25 30 35 40
distance from quenched end (mm)
distance from quenched end (mm)

4.10.8 WELDING
Pre-heat welding area to 250-450°C and maintain this temperature while welding with a low
hydrogen electrode. Cool at a maximum rate of 100°C per hour. Weld before carburising.

4.10.9 APPLICATIONS
Small diameter gear parts exposed to low-medium stress. Typical components include gears, planet
wheels, drive pinions, shafts.

53
 ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

4.11 ATLAS 6587: CASE–HARDENING ALLOY STEEL BAR

Colour coding: Signal Red (band) - Black
4.11.1 INTRODUCTION
Steel grade 17CrNiMo6 was registered as a grade in 1991 and is therefore one of the most contemporary
grades in the alloy bar market. It is characterised by high case hardness and depth combined with
excellent core strength. Recently the grade has been developed further by slightly increasing Carbon
and Manganese content and this led to the new designation 18CrNiMo7-6, which is the current official
designation for this steel under Euronorm EN 10084, which supersedes DIN17210.
4.11.2 RELATED SPECIFICATIONS
Atlas 6587 low-alloy steel bar complies with both 17CrNiMo6 (DIN17210) and 18CrNiMo7-6
(EN 10084) both described under Material Number 1.6587. The specification of 17CrNiMo6 is
practically equivalent to grade X4317 under AS 1444.
4.11.3 CHEMICAL COMPOSITION
Specification values in %
C Si Mn P S Cr Ni Mo
0.15-0.21 ≤ 0.40 0.50-0.90 ≤ 0.035 ≤ 0.035 1.50-1.80 1.40-1.70 0.25-0.35

4.11.4 CONDITIONS OF SUPPLY

Normally supplied in the annealed condition with hardness max 229 HB, with typical hardness
being in the range 170-200 HB. Bars are supplied peeled to k12 tolerance for bar diameters up to
210mm and peeled to -0/+2mm tolerance for larger diameters. All bars are ultrasonically inspected
to AS1065 level 2.
4.11.5 HEAT TREATMENT
Treatment Temperature Range (°C) Cooling
Oil (water), hot quench 160-250°C,Salt bath 580-
Carburizing 880 - 980
680°C, Case-hardening box, Air*
Intermediate annealing 630 - 650 Air, Furnace
Core hardening 830 – 870 Oil (water), hot quench 160-250°C*
Case hardening 780 – 820 Oil (water), hot quench 160-250°C*
Tempering 150 - 200 Air

* the choice of cooling medium depends on the desired final properties and geometry of the section
to be case hardened and the effect of the cooling medium, given the hardenability of the steel
The minimum tempering time is 1 hour, but a tempering period of 1 hour per 25mm of section is
recommended. If the steel is to be direct hardened, then in general, a carburizing temperature of 950°C is
not to be exceeded. After case hardening a typical surface (case) hardness of 62 HRC can be achieved.
Gas carburizing for 2 hours at 925°C results in 0.8mm case depth, whilst carburizing for 24 hours at
925°C results in 3.1mm case depth.
4.11.6 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES AFTER CASE HARDENING
The following table shows the typical mechanical properties achievable in the core section of
various diameters after carburizing, hardening and tempering.
Yield Strength Tensile Strength Impact Value (DVM)
Diameter (mm) Elongation (A%)
(MPa) (MPa) (J) min.
11 835 min 1180 - 1420 7 min 41
30 785 min 1080 - 1320 8 min 41
63 685 min 980 - 1270 8 min

54
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

4.11.7 WELDING
Pre-heat welding area to 250-450°C and maintain this temperature while welding with a low
hydrogen electrode. Cool at a maximum rate of 100°C per hour. Weld before carburising.

4.11.8 HARDENABILITY DIAGRAM

Hardness Limits for Jominy test

EN 10084 specification for 18CrNiMo7-6 (1.6587)
50

45
Rockwell Hardness (HRC)

40

max
min
35

30

25
0 1.5 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 20 25 30 35 40
distance from quenched end (mm)

4.11.9 APPLICATIONS
Gear parts exposed to highest stresses and wear conditions. Typical components include gears,
planetary gears, plate wheels, drive pinions and shafts.

55
 ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

4.12 ATLAS 6657: CASE–HARDENING ALLOY STEEL BAR

Colour Coding: Signal Red (band) – Signal Red (White stripe)
4.12.1 INTRODUCTION
Atlas 6657 is a 3.25% Nickel-Chromium case-hardening steel of high hardenability used principally
for intermediately to highly stressed components. Atlas 6657 can be carburised and subsequently
hardened by a quenching and tempering operation. Atlas 6657 is superior to case-hardening
steel En36A due to the addition of Molybdenum to this grade, which results in higher strength and
hardenability. It can also be considered as an alternative to EN39B

4.12.2 RELATED SPECIFICATIONS

Atlas 6657 complies with Euronorm steel grade 14NiCrMo13-4 (Material Number 1.6657 under
Euronorm EN 10084).

4.12.3 CHEMICAL COMPOSITION

Specification values in %

Grade C Si Mn P S Cr Ni Mo
En36A 0.10-0.16 ≤ 0.35 0.35-0.60 ≤ 0.040 ≤ 0.040 0.70-1.00 3.00-3.75 --
6657 0.11-0.17 ≤ 0.40 0.30-0.60 ≤ 0.035 ≤ 0.035 0.80-1.10 3.00-3.50 0.10-0.25

4.12.4 CONDITIONS OF SUPPLY

Normally supplied in the annealed condition with hardness max 241 HB, with typical hardness
being in the range 190-230 HB. Bars are peeled and are supplied in k12 tolerance for bar diameters
up to 210mm and peeled to -0/+2mm tolerance for larger diameters. All bars are ultrasonically
inspected in accordance with AS 1065 level 2.

4.12.5 HEAT TREATMENT

Treatment Temperature Range (°C) Cooling
Oil (water), hot quench 160-250°C, Salt bath 580-
Carburising 890 - 960
680°C, Case-hardening box, Air*
Intermediate annealing 630 - 650 Air, Furnace
Core hardening 835 – 865 Oil (water), hot quench 160-250°C*
Case hardening 780 – 810 Oil (water), hot quench 160-250°C*
Tempering 150 - 200 Air

* the choice of cooling medium depends on the desired final properties and geometry of the section
to be case hardened and the effect of the cooling medium, given the hardenability of the steel
Gas or pack carburise at 900 to 950°C to ensure the correct depth of hardening. Ideal carbon
potential is 0.9%. When pack carburising, use a mixture of old and new crystals to avoid over
carburising.
After carburising, cool to 830°C and direct quench or cool to ambient temperature, reheat to 830°C
and quench. Components may be quenched in oil or equivalent polymer or mar-quenched into
neutral salts at 150°C to 250°C, then air-cooled. There is no advantage in double quenching, but if
required core refine by oil quenching from 835 to 865°C. A refining treatment is then necessary to
improve the structure of the case and its hardness. Heat slowly to 780 to 810°C, hold until uniform
and then quench in oil.
The minimum tempering time is 1 hour, but a tempering period of 1 hour per 25mm of section is
recommended. If the steel is to be direct hardened, then in general, a carburizing temperature of
950°C should not be exceeded.
56
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

4.12.6 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES AFTER CASE HARDENING

The following table shows the typical mechanical properties of Atlas 6657 achievable in the core
section of test sections after carburizing, hardening and tempering. For reference purposes they are
compared to En36A.
Hardness Limits for Jominy test
EN 10084 specification for 14NiCrMo13-4 (1.6657)
Tensile Strength Impact value
50 Grade Diameter (mm) Elongation (A%)
(MPa) Charpy (V)
Rockwell Hardness (HRC)

45
En36A 19 1000 min 9 min 35 min
40 Atlas 6657 11 1230 -1480 9 min 35 min
max
35 Atlas 6657 30 1030
min -1330 10 min 35 min

30
Atlas 6657 63 880 -1180 11 min 43 min

With
25 6657 a typical case hardness of 62-63 HRC can be achieved.

20
4.12.7 HARDENABILITY
0 1.5 3 5 7 9 11 13DIAGRAM
15 20 25 30 35 40
distance from quenched end (mm)

Hardness Limits for Jominy test Hardness Limits for Jominy test
Typical values for En36A according to AS 1444 (X3312H) EN 10084 specification for 14NiCrMo13-4 (1.6657)
50
Rockwell Hardness (HRC)

Rockwell Hardness (HRC)

45 45

40 40
max max
35 min 35 min

30 30

25 25

20 20
0 1.5 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 20 25 30 35 40 0 1.5 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 20 25 30 35 40
distance from quenched end (mm) distance from quenched end (mm)

Hardness Limits for Jominy test

4.12.8 WELDING Typical values for En36A according to AS 1444 (X3312H)

Pre-heat welding area to 250-450°C and maintain45this temperature while welding with a low
Rockwell Hardness (HRC)

hydrogen electrode. Cool at a maximum rate of 100°C

40 per hour. Do not weld after carburising.
max

4.12.9 APPLICATIONS 35 min

30
Gear parts exposed to highest stresses and wear conditions. Typical components include gears,
planet wheels, drive pinions, shafts, bushes and sleeves.
25
Results in high core strength and excellent
toughness in the components and is very suitable for parts
20
with5 large
0 1.5 3 7
diameter.
9 11 13 15 20 25 30 35 40
distance from quenched end (mm)

57
 ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

4.13 ATLAS MICRO900: HIGH-TENSILE MICRO-ALLOY STEEL BAR

4.13.1 INTRODUCTION
Micro-alloy steels are principally carbon steels with very small additions of alloying elements such as
Vanadium, Titanium and Aluminium. Micro-alloy steels have mechanical properties in the as-rolled
condition similar to those of heat-treated steels (4140, 1045). Therefore they offer a cost-reducing
alternative to heat treated steels.
Micro-alloy steels assume their specific properties through so called thermo-mechanical rolling.
In this process the forming temperature and the cooling speed in between and after the forming
process steps are designed to produce the enhancement of the mechanical properties. Involved are
mainly the precipitation of V and Ti-carbides and formation of a very fine grained ferritic-pearlitic
microstructure during the cooling process. In addition Mn and Si play a role in the crystalline
network and optimally a pearlitic structure low in Carbon is formed during the cooling process.
Microalloy-steels are truly high-tech steels in which alloys have been partially replaced by minute
process control.

4.13.2 RELATED SPECIFICATIONS

Currently only German Specification (Euronorm pre-norm) DIN EN10267 deals with precipitation-
hardening ferritic-pearlitic steels. Atlas Micro900 complies with grade 38MnSiVS5 (Material
Number 1.1303) which is defined under DIN EN10267.

4.13.3 CHEMICAL COMPOSITION

Specification values in %

C Si Mn P S Al Ti V

0.35-0.40 0.50-0.70 1.20-1.50 ≤ 0.025 0.04-0.07 0.015-0.030 0.010-0.016 0.08-0.13

4.13.4 CONDITIONS OF SUPPLY – MECHANICAL PROPERTIES

AtlasMicro900 is supplied in the as-rolled condition. The product is thermo-mechanically rolled in
order to produce the desired mechanical properties.

4.13.4.1
Tensile Strength 0.2% proof Impact Value K
Diameter (mm) Elongation (%) Hardness (HB)
(MPa) stress (MPa) U (J)
up to 150 incl 850 – 1000 600 min 13 min 30 min 245 – 295

On special customer request Atlas Micro900 can be supplied in the as-rolled condition without
thermo-mechanical treatment. In this case the product has no specified mechanical properties but
strength and hardness are generally lower than in the thermo-mechanically treated condition. If the
product is to be forged, then Atlas Micro900 should be supplied in the plain as-rolled condition and
the appropriate mechanical properties will be achieved through the forging process and subsequent
controlled cooling.

4.13.5 CONDITIONS OF SUPPLY – SURFACE FINISH AND MACHINING ALLOWANCE

Atlas Micro900 Black is supplied with +/– tolerances according to 2 DIN 1013. Atlas Micro900
Bright is supplied cold drawn with h10 tolerance for bar diameters up to 25mm, bars with diameters
25 to 175mm are supplied as peeled with k12 tolerance.

58
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

4.13.6 MACHINING ALLOWANCES FOR ATLAS MICRO900 ROUND BAR (MM ON DIAMETER)
Black (hot rolled) Bright (drawn or peeled bar)
Bar diameter (mm)
part length <120mm part length >120mm part length <120mm part length >120mm
0-50 1.4mm 1.4 + 4mm/m 1.0mm 1.0 + 4mm/m
50-100 1.7mm 1.7 + 4mm/m 1.0mm 1.0 + 4mm/m
100-150 2.0mm 2.0 + 5mm/m 1.0mm 1.0 + 4mm/m
150-210 2.3mm 2.3 + 5mm/m 1.5mm 1.5 + 4mm/m

Hot-rolling surface defects are retained in cold drawing. For bright bar in the range of cold drawing
(up to 25mm) it is essential to take machining allowance into account. Peeled bar is generally free
of surface defects. A certain allowance for surface defects is recommended however, as minor
defects are permitted by the various national standards (AS, EN, etc.). A minor sulphur addition to
this grade gives significantly improved machinability.

4.13.7 FORGING
Components are to be forged at 1200°C ± 30°C. Forging finish temperature of the part should be
in the range of 1000 – 1100°C. Down to a temperature of 600 – 650°C a controlled cooling is
to be applied depending on the weight of the part as shown in the table.

Cooling speed

Weight of part (kg) ≤ 1.5 1.5 – 3.5 3.5 – 7.5 7.5 – 15.0 15.0 – 25.0

°C/min surface 120 90 70 55 46

°C/min core 90 80 60 47 40

Final cooling to room temperature should occur in a container.

4.13.8 SURFACE HARDENING

Atlas Micro900 can be induction hardened and when tempered at 150 – 200°C it achieves a
surface hardness of 52-55 HRC.

4.13.9 WELDING
Under certain conditions the material can be fusion welded. It is recommended to consult a welding
expert concerning the most suitable welding procedure.

4.13.10 APPLICATIONS OF ATLAS MICRO900

Medium-high stressed shafts and components where the use of carbon steel 1045 would not be
appropriate. Reasons for using Atlas Micro900 are the higher yield and fatigue strength, better
through hardening of the material and superior impact properties compared to plain carbon steels
like 1045. Machinability of Micro900 is also significantly better than that of 1045 steel. Substitution
of 1045 is particularly attractive if a 1045 steel component is to be heat treated.

Medium-high stressed components where currently 4140 steel is used. Atlas Micro900 offers
mechanical properties similar to those of 4140, though its impact properties are generally not
as good as those of 4140 steel. Substitution of 4140 by Atlas Micro900 offers a significant cost
saving potential both in material costs and machining cost, as the machinability of Micro900 is
substantially better than that of 4140 steel.

59
 ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

4.14 ATLAS 303: FREE MACHINING STAINLESS STEEL BAR

Colour Code: Light Blue
4.14.1 INTRODUCTION
Atlas 303 represents the optimum in machinability among the austenitic stainless steels. It is primarily
used when production involves extensive machining.
Atlas 303 is generally available as a UGIMA® and new generation UGIMA2® with machinability
significantly higher than that of the standard 303.
The sulphur addition which is responsible for the improved machining and galling characteristics of Atlas
303 lowers its corrosion resistance to below that of Atlas 304. As for other austenitic grades the structure
gives Atlas 303 excellent toughness, although the sulphur in 303 reduces its toughness slightly.
4.14.2 RELATED SPECIFICATIONS
Euronorm
Grade UNS No British BS Swedish SS Japanese JIS
No Name
303 S30300 303S31 1.4305 X8CrNiS18-9 2346 SUS 303

These comparisons are approximate only. The list is intended as a comparison of functionally
similar materials not as a schedule of contractual equivalents. If exact equivalents are needed
original specifications must be consulted.
4.14.3 CHEMICAL COMPOSITION
Specification values in %, according to ASTM A582/A582M
Grade C Mn Si P S Cr Mo Ni
303 ≤ 0.15 ≤ 2.0 ≤ 1.00 ≤ 0.20 ≥ 0.15 17.0-19.0 -- 8.0-10.0

4.14.4 CONDITIONS OF SUPPLY – SPECIFIED MECHANICAL PROPERTIES

Tensile Strength Yield Strength 0.2% Elongation Hardness Brinell
Diameter (mm)
(MPa) Proof (MPa) (% in 50mm) (HB)
≤ 15mm 750 – 800 typical 450 – 650 typical 34 typical 262 max
>15mm ≤ 25.4mm 700 typical 350 – 450 typical 44 typical 262 max
> 25.4mm 650 typical 300 typical 58 typical 262 max

Note that ASTM A582M only specifies hardness – tensile properties included above are not
guaranteed and for information only. Drawn bars, generally up to 25.4mm diameter have higher
strength values. Proof (yield) stress values in particular are significantly higher and the percentage
elongation lower.
4.14.5 CONDITION OF SUPPLY – TYPICAL PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
Mean Coefficient of Thermal
Elastic Thermal Conductivity Specific Heat Electrical
Density Expansion
Modulus 0-100°C Resistivity
(kg/m³) 0-100°C 0-315°C 0-538°C at 100°C at 500°C
(GPa) ( J/kg.K) (nΩ.m)
(mm/m/°C) (mm/m/°C) (mm/m/°C) (W/m.K) (W/m.K)
7900 193 17.3 17.8 18.4 16.3 21.5 500 720

4.14.6 CORROSION RESISTANCE

Good resistance to mildly corrosive atmospheres, but significantly less than Atlas 304 due to the sulphur
addition; the sulphide inclusions act as pit initiation sites. Atlas 303 should not be exposed to marine or
other similar environments, as these will result in rapid pitting corrosion. Because the sulphide inclusions in
Atlas 303 are primarily aligned along the rolling direction the corrosion resistance is particularly reduced
in cross-sections.
Atlas 303, like other common austenitic stainless steels, is subject to stress corrosion cracking in
chloride containing environments above about 50°C.
60 Consult Atlas Technical Assistance for specific environmental recommendations.
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

4.14.7 HEAT RESISTANCE

Good oxidation resistance in intermittent service to 760°C and in continuous service to 870°C.
Continuous use in the 425-860°C range is not usually recommended due to carbide precipitation
– Atlas 303 usually does not have a low carbon content so is susceptible to sensitisation, which can
lead to intergranular corrosion.

4.14.8 PROCESSING
As well as reducing the corrosion resistance, the sulphur additions in 303 also result in poor
weldability and reduced formability compared to Grade 304. Sharp bends should not be attempted
in 303. A practical compromise alternative may be a 304 Ugima Improved Machinability grade
- this does not machine as readily as 303, but does offer better formability (as well as excellent
weldability and significantly better corrosion resistance).

4.14.9 CONDITIONS OF SUPPLY – FINISH, DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES

4.14.9.1 Surface Finish
Round bar up to 25.4mm diameter is all cold drawn. Round bars over 25.4 and up to 127.00mm
diameter are smooth-turned and polished. Round bars over 127.00mm diameter are all peeled.

All hexagon bar and all square bar is cold drawn.

4.14.9.2 Diameter and A/F tolerances

Round Bar: Cold drawn h9; Smooth-turned and Polished h10; Peeled up to 160mm k12;
Peeled over 160mm +1.5mm/-0; Centreless ground h9 or h8
Square Bar: h11; Hex Bar: h11.

4.14.9.3 Straightness – maximum deviation from a straight line

Round Bar: 1.5mm in 1500mm and may not exceed: 1.5mm x length in mm / 1500mm
Squares and Hexagon: 1.5mm in 1500mm and may not exceed: 1.5mm x length in mm / 1500mm

Other tolerances may be supplied for more critical applications upon enquiry.

4.14.9.4 Length Tolerance

Sizes up to 25.4mm: Mill Lengths and Set Lengths, +50mm/-0
Sizes up from 25.4mm to 50.8mm: Mill Lengths and Set Lengths, +100mm/-0
Sizes over 50.8mm: Mill Lengths and Set Lengths, ± 300mm (varies depending on size)

4.14.10 UGIMA® 303 AND UGIMA2® 303 FOR TOP PERFORMANCE IN MACHINING
A UGIMA® improved machinability version of grade 303 is available in round, hexagon and square
bar. UGIMA® 303 machines significantly better than standard 303, enabling a higher rate of metal
removal and lower tool wear in many operations. Surface quality and reliability of machining results
will improve too when using UGIMA® 303. UGIMA2® 303, is the new generation product offering
further benefits of improved chip-breakability, substantially longer tool life and productivity benefits also
in the low machining speed range.

For UGIMA® 303 and UGIMA2® 303 detailed set-up tables are available on request, specifying
machining parameters (surface speed, feed rate, depth of cut and type of tool) for high-speed steel
tooling and carbide insert tooling for the most common machining operations (roughing, finishing,
drilling, parting-off etc.). Machinability assistance is available for optimal set-up and problem-
solving for specific machining jobs.
61
 ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

4.14.11 HEAT TREATMENT

The following temperature ranges are applicable for the respective heat treatment operations.

Forging Annealing

900 – 1200°C 1010 – 1120°C

Cool rapidly after annealing. Atlas 303 cannot be hardened by thermal treatment.

4.14.12 WELDING
Not generally recommended but, if unavoidable use Grade 308L or 309 electrodes. AS 1554.6
does not pre-qualify welding of 303. Welds must be annealed for maximum corrosion resistance,
but even then poor mechanical and corrosion properties will result.

4.14.13 APPLICATIONS OF ATLAS 303

Nuts and bolts. Bushings. Shafts. Electrical switchgear components. Gears. In general any component
that is heavily machined and where the corrosion resistance and fabrication properties of 303 are
viable.

4.14.14 POSSIBLE ALTERNATIVE GRADES

Grade Why it may be chosen instead of Atlas 303
303UX UGIMA® 303UX offers the highest machinability for long run repetition machining.
Better corrosion resistance, formability or weldability are needed, at the expense of lower machinability.
304
Consider UGIMA® 304 or UGIMA® 304Cu
Higher resistance to pitting and crevice corrosion is required, in chloride environments. A lower machinability
316
can be accepted.
Even higher machinability than 303 is needed, and a lower corrosion resistance can be tolerated. Or hardening
416
by thermal treatment is required, while maintaining a high machinability.

62
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

4.15 ATLAS 304: STAINLESS STEEL BAR

Colour Code: Lilac/Turquoise
4.15.1 INTRODUCTION
Grade 304 is the standard “18/8” stainless. It has excellent forming and welding characteristics.
Grade 304L, the low carbon version of 304, does not require post-weld annealing and so is extensively
used in heavy gauge components. The austenitic structure also gives these grades excellent toughness,
even down to cryogenic temperatures.
4.15.2 RELATED SPECIFICATIONS
Euronorm
Grade UNS No British BS Swedish SS Japanese JIS
No Name
304 S30400 304S31 1.4301 X5CrNi18-10 2332 SUS 304
304L S30403 304S11 1.4306 X2CrNi19-11 2352 SUS 304L

These comparisons are approximate only. The list is intended as a comparison of functionally similar
materials not as a schedule of contractual equivalents. If exact equivalents are needed original
specifications must be consulted.
4.15.3 CHEMICAL COMPOSITION
Specification values in %, according to ASTM A276
Grade C Mn Si P S Cr Mo Ni N
304 ≤ 0.08 ≤ 2.0 ≤ 1.00 ≤ 0.045 ≤ 0.030 18.0-20.0 8.0-11.0
304L ≤ 0.03 ≤ 2.0 ≤ 1.00 ≤ 0.045 ≤ 0.030 18.0-20.0 8.0-12.0

Atlas304 bar is generally stocked in “Dual Certified” form. These products have chemical and mechanical
properties complying with both 304 and 304L specifications. Such dual certified product does not meet
304H specifications and may be unacceptable for high temperature (over about 500°C) applications.
4.15.4 CONDITIONS OF SUPPLY – SPECIFIED MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
Values below are specified values according to ASTM A276, condition A, for cold finished 304 bars.
Tensile Strength 0.2% proof stress Elongation Reduction of
Diameter (mm)
(MPa) min (MPa) min (% in 50mm) min Area (%) min
≤ 12.70 520 310 30 40
>12.70 515 205 30 40

4.15.5 CONDITION OF SUPPLY – TYPICAL PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

Elastic Mean Coefficient of Thermal Expansion Thermal Conductivity Specific Heat Electrical
Density
Modulus 0-100°C Resistivity
(kg/m³) 0-100°C 0-315°C 0-538°C at 100°C at 500°C
(GPa) (J/kg.K) (nΩ.m)
(mm/m/°C) (mm/m/°C) (mm/m/°C) (W/m.K) (W/m.K)
7900 193 17.2 17.8 18.4 16.3 21.5 500 720

4.15.6 CORROSION RESISTANCE

Excellent in a wide range of atmospheric environments and many corrosive media. Subject to pitting and
crevice corrosion in warm chloride environments, and to stress corrosion cracking above about 50°C.
Considered resistant to potable water with up to about 200mg/L chlorides at ambient temperatures,
reducing to about 150mg/L at 60°C. Consult Atlas Technical Assistance for specific environmental
recommendations.
4.15.7 HEAT RESISTANCE
Good oxidation resistance in intermittent service to 870°C and in continuous service to 925°C. Continuous
use of 304 in the 425-860°C range is not recommended if subsequent aqueous corrosion resistance
is important, but 304L and dual certified product 304/304L does not suffer from this problem. For
temperatures above 500°C specific high-temperature grades would normally be chosen such as 304H,
321H, 310 or S30815. 63
 ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

4.15.8 CONDITIONS OF SUPPLY – FINISH, DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES

4.15.8.1 Surface Finish
Round bar up to 25.4mm diameter is all cold drawn. Round bars over 25.4 and up to 127.00mm
diameter are smooth-turned and polished. Round bars over 127.00mm diameter are all peeled.
All hexagon bar and all square bar is cold drawn.
4.15.8.2 Diameter and A/F tolerances
Round Bar: Cold drawn h9; Smooth-turned and Polished h10; Peeled up to 160mm k12; Peeled
over 160mm +1.5mm/-0; Centreless ground h9 or h8
Square Bar: h11; Hex Bar: h11.
4.15.8.3 Straightness – maximum deviation from a straight line
Round Bar: 1.5mm in 1500mm and may not exceed: 1.5mm x length in mm / 1500mm
Squares and Hexagon: 1.5mm in 1500mm and may not exceed: 1.5mm x length in mm / 1500mm
Other tolerances may be supplied for more critical applications upon enquiry.
4.15.8.4 Length Tolerance
Sizes up to 25.4mm: Mill Lengths and Set Lengths, +50mm/-0
Sizes up from 25.4mm to 50.8mm: Mill Lengths and Set Lengths, +100mm/-0
Sizes over 50.8mm: Mill Lengths and Set Lengths, +300mm (varies depending on size)
4.15.9 UGIMA® 304 FOR TOP PERFORMANCE IN MACHINING
A UGIMA® improved machinability version of grade 304 is available in round, hexagon and
square bar. UGIMA® 304 machines significantly better than standard 304 or 304L, enabling a
higher rate of metal removal and lower tool wear in many operations. Surface quality and reliability
of machining results will improve too when using UGIMA® 304. For UGIMA® 304 detailed set-up
table are available on request, specifying machining parameters (surface speed, feed rate, depth
of cut and type of tool) for high-speed steel tooling and carbide insert tooling for the most common
machining operations (roughing, finishing, drilling, parting-off etc.). Machinability assistance is
available for optimal set-up and problem-solving for specific machining jobs.
4.15.10 HEAT TREATMENT
The following temperature ranges are applicable for the respective heat treatment operations.
Forging Annealing
900 – 1200°C 1010 – 1120°C

Cool rapidly after annealing. Atlas 304 cannot be hardened by thermal treatment.
4.15.11 WELDING
Excellent weldability by all standard fusion methods, both with and without filler metals. AS 1554.6
pre-qualifies welding of 304 with Grade 308 and 304L with 308L rods or electrodes (and with their
high silicon equivalents). Heavy welded sections in Grade 304 may require post-weld annealing for
maximum corrosion resistance. This is not required for Grade 304L.

4.15.12 APPLICATIONS OF ATLAS 304

Food processing equipment, particularly in beer brewing, milk processing & wine making. Kitchen
appliances and equipment. Heat exchanger components. Threaded fasteners. Springs.
4.15.13 POSSIBLE ALTERNATIVE GRADES
Grade Why it may be chosen instead of 304/L
304Cu Lower work hardening rate is needed for cold forging of screws, bolts and rivets. Higher machinability than 304/L.
303 Higher machinability needed, and the lower corrosion resistance, formability and weldability are acceptable.
316 Higher resistance to pitting and crevice corrosion is required, in chloride environments.
430 A lower cost is required, and the reduced corrosion resistance and fabrication characteristics are acceptable.
64
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

4.16 ATLAS 316: STAINLESS STEEL BAR

Colour Code: Bottle Green/Marigold
4.16.1 INTRODUCTION
Atlas 316 is the standard molybdenum-bearing stainless steel, second in importance to 304 amongst the
austenitic stainless steels. The molybdenum gives 316 better overall corrosion resistant properties than
Grade 304, particularly higher resistance to pitting and crevice corrosion in chloride environments. It
has excellent forming and welding characteristics. Post-weld annealing is not required when welding
thin sections.
Atlas 316L is immune from sensitisation (grain boundary carbide precipitation) and so is extensively used
in heavy gauge welded components (over about 6mm). The austenitic structure also gives these grades
excellent toughness, even down to cryogenic temperatures.
4.16.2 RELATED SPECIFICATIONS
Euronorm
Grade UNS No British BS Swedish SS Japanese JIS
No Name
316 S31600 316S31 1.4401 X5CrNiMo17-12-2 2347 SUS 316
316L S31603 316S11 1.4404 X2CrNiMo17-12-2 2348 SUS 316L

These comparisons are approximate only. The list is intended as a comparison of functionally similar
materials not as a schedule of contractual equivalents. If exact equivalents are needed original
specifications must be consulted.
4.16.3 CHEMICAL COMPOSITION
Specification values in %, according to ASTM A276
Grade C Mn Si P S Cr Mo Ni
316 ≤ 0.08 ≤ 2.0 ≤ 1.00 ≤ 0.045 ≤ 0.030 16.0-18.0 2.0-3.0 10.0-14.0
316L ≤ 0.03 ≤ 2.0 ≤ 1.00 ≤ 0.045 ≤ 0.030 16.0-18.0 2.0-3.0 10.0-14.0

Atlas316 bar is generally stocked in “Dual Certified” form. These products have chemical and mechanical
properties complying with both 316 and 316L specifications. Such dual certified product does not meet
316H specifications and may be unacceptable for high temperature (over about 500°C) applications.
4.16.4 CONDITIONS OF SUPPLY – SPECIFIED MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
Values below are specified values according to ASTM A276, condition A, for cold finished bars.
Tensile Strength 0.2% proof stress Elongation Reduction of Area
Diameter (mm)
(MPa) min (MPa) min (% in 50mm) min (%) min
≤ 12.70 620 310 30 40
>12.70 515 205 30 40

4.16.5 CONDITION OF SUPPLY – TYPICAL PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

Elastic Mean Coefficient of Thermal Expansion Thermal Conductivity Specific Heat Electrical
Density
Modulus 0-100°C 0-315°C 0-538°C at 100°C at 500°C 0-100°C Resistivity
(kg/m³)
(GPa) (mm/m/°C) (mm/m/°C) (mm/m/°C) (W/m.K) (W/m.K) (J/kg.K) (nΩ.m)

8000 193 15.9 16.2 17.5 16.3 21.5 500 740

4.16.6 CORROSION RESISTANCE

Excellent in a range of atmospheric environments and many corrosive media - generally more resistant
than 304. Subject to pitting and crevice corrosion in warm chloride environments, and to stress corrosion
cracking above about 50°C. Considered resistant to potable water with up to about 1000mg/L chlorides
at ambient temperatures, reducing to about 500mg/L at 60°C.
316 is usually regarded as the standard “marine grade stainless steel”, but it is not resistant to warm sea
water. In many marine environments Atlas 316 does exhibit surface corrosion, usually visible as brown
staining. This is particularly associated with crevices and rough surface finish.
Consult Atlas Technical Assistance for specific environmental recommendations. 65
 ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

4.16.7 HEAT RESISTANCE

Good oxidation resistance in intermittent service to 870°C and in continuous service to 925°C.
Continuous use of Atlas 316 in the 425-860°C range is not recommended if subsequent aqueous
corrosion resistance is important. Atlas 316 is reasonably resistant to carbide precipitation and can
be used in the above temperature range. Grade 316H has higher strength at elevated temperatures
and is sometimes used for structural and pressure-containing applications at temperatures above
about 500°C, but the titanium stabilised grade 316Ti is often a more appropriate choice.

4.16.8 CONDITIONS OF SUPPLY – FINISH, DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES

4.16.8.1 Surface Finish
Round bar up to 25.4mm diameter is all cold drawn. Round bars over 25.4 and up to127.00mm
diameter are smooth-turned and polished. Round bars over 127.00mm diameter are all peeled.

All hexagon bar and all square bar is cold drawn.

4.16.8.2 Diameter and A/F tolerances

Round Bar: Cold drawn h9; Smooth-turned and Polished h10; Peeled up to 160mm k12;
Peeled over 160mm +1.5mm/-0; Centreless ground h9 or h8
Square Bar: h11; Hex Bar: h11.

4.16.8.3 Straightness – maximum deviation from a straight line

Round Bar: 1.5mm in 1500mm and may not exceed: 1.5mm x length in mm / 1500mm
Squares and Hexagon: 1.5mm in 1500mm and may not exceed: 1.5mm x length in mm / 1500mm
Other tolerances may be supplied for more critical applications upon enquiry.

4.16.8.4 Length Tolerance

Sizes up to 25.4mm: Mill Lengths and Set Lengths, +50mm/-0
Sizes up from 25.4mm to 50.8mm: Mill Lengths and Set Lengths, +100mm/-0
Sizes over 50.8mm: Mill Lengths and Set Lengths, ± 300mm (varies depending on size)

4.16.9 UGIMA® 316 AND UGIMA2® 316 FOR TOP PERFORMANCE IN MACHINING
A UGIMA® improved machinability version of grade 316 is available in round, hexagon and
square bar. UGIMA® 316 machines significantly better than standard 316 or 316L, enabling
a higher rate of metal removal and lower tool wear in many operations. Surface quality and
reliability of machining results will improve too when using UGIMA® 316. UGIMA2® 316 is the
new generation product offering further benefits of improved chip-breakability, substantially longer
tool life and productivity benefits also in the low machining speed range.

For UGIMA® 316 and UGIMA2® 316 detailed set-up tables are available on request, specifying
machining parameters (surface speed, feed rate, depth of cut and type of tool) for high-speed tooling
and carbide insert tooling for the most common machining operations (roughing, finishing, drilling,
parting-off etc.). Machinability assistance is available for optimal set-up and problem-solving for specific
machining jobs.

66
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

4.16.10 HEAT TREATMENT

The following temperature ranges are applicable for the respective heat treatment operations.

Forging Annealing

900 – 1200°C 1010 – 1120°C

Cool rapidly after annealing. Atlas 316 cannot be hardened by thermal treatment.

4.16.11 WELDING
Excellent weldability by all standard fusion methods, both with and without filler metals. AS 1554.6
pre-qualifies welding of 316 with Grade 316 and 316L with Grade 316L rods or electrodes (or
their high silicon equivalents). Both can be applied for Atlas 316. Heavy welded sections do not
require post-weld annealing for maximum corrosion resistance. Grade 316Ti may also be used as
an alternative to Atlas 316 for heavy section welding.

4.16.12 APPLICATIONS OF ATLAS 316

Food processing equipment. Laboratory equipment. Architectural panelling, railings & trim. Boat
fittings. Heat exchangers. Components for mining, quarrying & water filtration. Threaded fasteners.
Springs.

4.16.13 POSSIBLE ALTERNATIVE GRADES

Grade Why it may be chosen instead of Atlas 316/316L

316Ti Better resistance to temperatures of around 600-900°C is needed.

904L Much higher resistance to chlorides at elevated temperatures, with good formability
2205 Much higher resistance to chlorides at elevated temperatures, and higher strength than 316

67
 ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

4.17 ATLAS 420: STAINLESS STEEL BAR

Colour Code: Rose Pink
4.17.1 INTRODUCTION
Grade 420 stainless steel is a higher carbon version of 410 which can be hardened by a quench-
and-temper heat treatment. It contains a minimum of 12 per cent chromium, just sufficient to give
corrosion resistance in fairly mild environment. It has good ductility in the annealed condition but
is capable of being hardened up to Rockwell Hardness 50HRC, the highest hardness of the 12 per
cent chromium grades. Its best corrosion resistance is achieved when the metal is hardened and
surface ground or polished. This datasheet describes the standard Atlas 420. Variants with carbon
content controlled within particular ranges are also available, usually designated 420A (lowest
carbon) and increasing through 420B and 420C. Consult Atlas for details.
Martensitic stainless steels are optimised for high hardness, and other properties are to some
degree compromised. Fabrication must be by methods that allow for poor weldability and usually
also allow for a final harden and temper heat treatment. Corrosion resistance is lower than the
common austenitic grades, and their useful operating temperature range is limited by their loss of
ductility at sub-zero temperatures and loss of strength by over-tempering at elevated temperatures.
4.17.2 RELATED SPECIFICATIONS
Euronorm
Grade UNS No British BS Swedish SS Japanese JIS
No Name
420 S42000 420S37 1.4021 X20Cr13 2303 SUS 420J1

These comparisons are approximate only. The list is intended as a comparison of functionally
similar materials not as a schedule of contractual equivalents. If exact equivalents are needed
original specifications must be consulted.
4.17.3 CHEMICAL COMPOSITION
Specification values in %, according to ASTM A276
Grade C Mn Si P S Cr Mo Ni

420 ≤ 0.15 ≤ 1.0 ≤ 1.0 ≤ 0.040 ≤ 0.030 12.0-14.0 -- --

4.17.4 CONDITIONS OF SUPPLY – SPECIFIED MECHANICAL PROPERTIES

Diameter Tensile 0.2% proof Elongation Reduction of Hardness
Condition
(mm) Strength (MPa) stress (MPa) min (% in 50mm) min Area (%) min (HB 30)
all Annealed ≤ 230
Up to 160 Hardened & Tempered 850 – 1000 600 12 50

4.17.5 CONDITION OF SUPPLY – TYPICAL PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

Elastic Mean Coefficient of Thermal Expansion Thermal Conductivity Specific Heat Electrical
Density
Modulus 0-100°C 0-315°C 0-538°C at 100°C at 500°C 0-100°C Resistivity
(kg/m³)
(GPa) (mm/m/°C) (mm/m/°C) (mm/m/°C) (W/m.K) (W/m.K) (J/kg.K) (nΩ.m)

7700 200 10.3 10.8 11.7 24.9 - 460 550

4.17.6 CORROSION RESISTANCE

Grade 420 has good resistance in the hardened condition to the atmosphere, foods, fresh water
and mild alkalies or acids. Corrosion resistance is lower in the annealed condition.
Performance is best with a centreless ground surface finish. Less corrosion resistant than the austenitic
grades and also less than 17% chromium ferritic alloys such as Grade 430; 420 also has slightly
lower resistance than grade 410.
Consult Atlas Technical Assistance for specific environmental recommendations.
4.17.7 HEAT RESISTANCE
Not recommended for use in temperatures above the relevant tempering temperature, because of
68 reduction in mechanical properties. The scaling temperature is approximately 650°C.
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

4.17.8 CONDITIONS OF SUPPLY – FINISH, DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES

4.17.8.1 Surface Finish
Round bar up to 25.4mm diameter is all cold drawn. Round bars over 25.4 and up to 127.00mm
diameter are smooth-turned and polished. Round bars over 127.00mm diameter are all peeled.
All hexagon bar and all square bar is cold drawn.
4.17.8.2 Diameter and A/F tolerances
Round Bar: Cold drawn h9; Smooth-turned and Polished h10; Peeled up to 160mm k12; Peeled
over 160mm +1.5mm/-0; Centreless ground h9 or h8
Square Bar: h11; Hex Bar: h11.
4.17.8.3 Straightness – maximum deviation from a straight line
Round Bar: 1.5mm in 1500mm and may not exceed: 1.5mm x length in mm / 1500mm
Squares and Hexagon: 1.5mm in 1500mm and may not exceed: 1.5mm x length in mm / 1500mm
Other tolerances may be supplied for more critical applications upon enquiry.
4.17.8.4 Length Tolerance
Sizes up to 25.4mm: Mill Lengths and Set Lengths, +50mm/-0
Sizes up from 25.4mm to 50.8mm: Mill Lengths and Set Lengths, +100mm/-0
Sizes over 50.8mm: Mill Lengths and Set Lengths, ± 300mm (varies depending on size)
4.17.9 UGIMA® 420 FOR TOP PERFORMANCE IN MACHINING
A UGIMA® improved machinability version of grade 420 is available in round, hexagon and
square bar. UGIMA®420 machines significantly better than standard 420, enabling a higher
rate of metal removal and lower tool wear in many operations. Surface quality and reliability of
machining results will improve too when using UGIMA®420. For UGIMA®420 detailed set-up
tables are available on request, specifying machining parameters (surface speed, feed rate, depth
of cut and type of tool) for high-speed steel tooling and carbide insert tooling for the most common
machining operations (roughing, finishing, drilling, parting-off etc.). Machinability assistance is
available for optimal set-up and problem-solving for specific machining jobs.
4.17.10 HEAT TREATMENT
The following temperature ranges are applicable for the respective heat treatment operations.
Forging Annealing Hardening Tempering
800 – 1100°C 840 – 900°C 980 – 1035°C 600 – 750°C

After annealing execute a slow furnace cool to 600°C and then air cool.
The tempering range 425 – 600°C should be avoided.
4.17.11 WELDING
Pre-heat to 150-320°C and post-heat at 610-760°C. Grade 420 coated welding rods are recommended
for high strength joints, where a post-weld hardening and tempering heat treatment is to be carried out.
If parts are to be used in the “as welded” condition, a ductile joint can be achieved by using Grade 309
filler rod. AS 1554.6 pre-qualifies welding of 420 with Grade 309 rods or electrodes.
4.17.12 APPLICATIONS OF ATLAS420
Shafts and axles, pump components. Valve cones. Surgical instruments. Needle valves. Shear blades.
4.17.13 POSSIBLE ALTERNATIVE GRADES
Grade Why it may be chosen instead of Atlas420
410 Only a lower hardened strength is needed.
416 High machinability is required, and the lower hardened strength and lower corrosion resistance of 416 is acceptable.
440C A higher hardened strength or hardness than can be obtained from 420 is needed.
Variations of 420 are available to special order often identified as 420A, 420B etc. These offer higher
“specials”
hardness, corrosion resistance and machinability for particular applications. 69
 ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

4.18 ATLAS 431: STAINLESS STEEL BAR

Colour Code: Signal Red
4.18.1 INTRODUCTION
This heat treatable martensitic, nickel-bearing grade has the best corrosion resistance properties
of all the martensitic grades. It has excellent tensile and torque strength, and good toughness,
making it ideally suited to shafting and bolt applications. It can be hardened to approximately
40HRC. Because of its high yield strength, this grade is not readily cold worked and is therefore not
recommended for use in operations such as cold heading, bending, deep drawing or spinning.

Martensitic stainless steels are optimised for high hardness, and other properties are to some degree
compromised. Fabrication must be by methods that allow for poor weldability and usually also
allow for a final harden and temper heat treatment. Corrosion resistance is generally lower than the
common austenitic grades, and their useful operating temperature range is limited by their loss of
ductility at sub-zero temperatures and loss of strength by over-tempering at elevated temperatures.

4.18.2 RELATED SPECIFICATIONS

Euronorm
Grade UNS No British BS Swedish SS Japanese JIS
No Name
431 S43100 431S29 1.4057 X17CrNi16-2 2321 SUS 431

These comparisons are approximate only. The list is intended as a comparison of functionally
similar materials not as a schedule of contractual equivalents. If exact equivalents are needed
original specifications must be consulted.

4.18.3 CHEMICAL COMPOSITION

Specification values in %, according to ASTM A276

Grade C Mn Si P S Cr Mo Ni

431 ≤ 0.20 ≤ 1.00 ≤ 1.00 ≤ 0.040 ≤ 0.030 15.0 – 17.0 -- 1.25 – 2.50

4.18.4 CONDITIONS OF SUPPLY – SPECIFIED MECHANICAL PROPERTIES

Tensile Strength 0.2% proof stress Elongation (% in
Condition Hardness (HB)
(MPa) min (MPa) min 50mm) min
Annealed -- -- -- 285 max
Hardened & Tempered 850 - 1000 665 min. 12 min. 248 - 302

Atlas 431 is generally stocked and supplied in “Condition T” to AS 1444 or BS 970, with specified
tensile strength of 850 - 1000MPa. Yield and elongation are typically in conformance with the limits
listed above.

ASTM A276 only lists a Condition A version of Grade 431; the annealed hardness listed above is
the specified maximum. Atlas 431 is only rarely stocked in annealed Condition A.

4.18.5 CONDITION OF SUPPLY – TYPICAL PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

Elastic Mean Coefficient of Thermal Expansion Thermal Conductivity Specific Heat Electrical
Density
Modulus 0-100°C 0-315°C 0-538°C at 100°C at 500°C 0-100°C Resistivity
(kg/m³)
(GPa) (mm/m/°C) (mm/m/°C) (mm/m/°C) (W/m.K) (W/m.K) (J/kg.K) (nΩ.m)
7700 200 10.2 12.1 - 20.2 - 460 720

70
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

4.18.6 CORROSION RESISTANCE

Grade 431 has excellent resistance to a wide variety of corrosive media. It has reasonable
resistance to salt water in cold southern waters but is unlikely to be successful in warmer tropical
waters. Overall the corrosion resistance of 431 is approximately the same as or slightly below that
of Grade 304.

Performance is best with a smooth surface finish, in the hardened and tempered condition.

Consult Atlas Technical Assistance for specific environmental recommendations.

4.18.7 HEAT RESISTANCE

Resists scaling in intermittent service to 925°C and in continuous service to 870°C, but is generally
not recommended for use in temperatures above the relevant tempering temperature, because of
reduction in mechanical properties.

4.18.8 CONDITIONS OF SUPPLY – FINISH, DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES

4.18.8.1 Surface Finish
Round bar up to 25.4mm diameter is all cold drawn. Round bars over 25.4 and up to127.00mm
diameter are smooth-turned and polished. Round bars over 127.00mm diameter are all peeled.

All hexagon bar and all square bar is cold drawn.

4.18.8.2 Diameter and A/F tolerances

Round Bar: Cold drawn h9; Smooth-turned and Polished h10; Peeled up to 160mm k12; Peeled
over 160mm +1.5mm/-0; Centreless ground h9 or h8
Square Bar: h11; Hex Bar: h11.

4.18.8.3 Straightness – maximum deviation from a straight line

Round Bar: 1.5mm in 1500mm and may not exceed: 1.5mm x length in mm / 1500mm
Squares and Hexagon: 1.5mm in 1500mm and may not exceed: 1.5mm x length in mm / 1500mm

Other tolerances may be supplied for more critical applications upon enquiry.

4.18.8.4 Length Tolerance

Sizes up to 25.4mm: Mill Lengths and Set Lengths, +50mm/-0
Sizes up from 25.4mm to 50.8mm: Mill Lengths and Set Lengths, +100mm/-0
Sizes over 50.8mm: Mill Lengths and Set Lengths, ± 300mm (varies depending on size)

4.18.9 UGIMA® 431 FOR TOP PERFORMANCE IN MACHINING

A UGIMA® improved machinability version of grade 431 is available in round, hexagon and
square bar. UGIMA® 431 machines significantly better than standard 431, enabling a higher
rate of metal removal and lower tool wear in many operations. Surface quality and reliability of
machining results will improve too when using UGIMA® 431. For UGIMA® 431 detailed set-up
tables are available on request, specifying machining parameters (surface speed, feed rate, depth
of cut and type of tool) for high-speed steel tooling and carbide insert tooling for the most common
machining operations (roughing, finishing, drilling, parting-off etc.). Machinability assistance is
available for optimal set-up and problem-solving for specific machining jobs.

71
 ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

4.18.10 HEAT TREATMENT

The following temperature ranges are applicable for the respective heat treatment operations.

Forging Annealing Hardening Tempering

900 – 1200°C 620 – 660°C 980 – 1065°C 600 – 800°C

Process Anneal - heat to 620-660°C and subsequently air cool. Full annealed is not a practical
option.

Hardened by heating to 980-1065°C, holding for about 1/2 hour then quenching in air or oil. Pre-
heating at 760-790°C may be useful for complex parts or those already hardened. Temper to suit
mechanical requirements, at temperatures as indicated in the table.

The tempering range 425-600°C should be avoided due to reduced impact toughness, although the
effect is less marked than in most other martensitic grades.

Refer to the following table for mechanical properties achieved at various tempering temperatures.

Tempering Tensile Strength 0.2% Proof Elongation Hardness Brinell

Impact Izod (J)
Temperature (°C) (MPa) Stress (MPa) (% in 50mm) (HB)
300 1320 1020 20 380 75
400 1310 1010 22 395 80
500 1350 1030 20 395 55
600 1030 800 20 310 45
700 920 700 20 290 70

4.18.11 WELDING

Welding is difficult due to the risk of cracking. A pre-heat of 200-300°C is recommended prior to
welding. Grade 410 filler rod can be used, but Grades 308L, 309 or 310 will provide more ductile
welds, so long as matching properties are not required. Post-weld heat treat at 650°C.

4.18.12 APPLICATIONS OF ATLAS 431

Nuts and bolts. Propeller shafting. Pump shafts. Beater bars. Marine hardware.

4.18.13 POSSIBLE ALTERNATIVE GRADES

Grade Why it may be chosen instead of Atlas431

410 Only a lower hardened strength is needed.

416 High machinability is required, and the lower strength and lower corrosion resistance of 416 is acceptable.
440C A higher hardened strength or hardness than can be obtained from 431 is needed.

72
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

4.19 ATLAS 2205: DUPLEX STAINLESS STEEL BAR

Colour Code: Lime
4.19.1 INTRODUCTION
2205 is the most widely used duplex (ferritic/austenitic) stainless steel grade. It finds applications
due to both excellent corrosion resistance and high strength.
The standard S31803 composition has over the years been refined by many steel suppliers, and the resulting
restricted composition range was endorsed as UNS S32205 in 1996. S32205 gives better guaranteed
corrosion resistance, but much of the S31803 currently produced also complies with S32205.
Atlas 2205 is not generally suitable for use at temperatures above 300°C as it suffers from
precipitation of brittle micro-constituents, nor below -50°C because of its ductile-to-brittle-transition.
4.19.2 RELATED SPECIFICATIONS
Euronorm
Grade UNS No British BS Swedish SS Japanese JIS
No Name
2205 S31803 / S32205 318S13 1.4462 X2CrNiMoN22-5-3 2377 SUS329J3L

These comparisons are approximate only. The list is intended as a comparison of functionally
similar materials not as a schedule of contractual equivalents. If exact equivalents are needed
original specifications must be consulted.
4.19.3 CHEMICAL COMPOSITION
Specification values in %, according to ASTM A276
Grade C Mn Si P S Cr Mo Ni N
2205 (S31803) ≤ 0.03 ≤ 2.0 ≤ 1.0 ≤ 0.030 ≤ 0.020 21.0-23.0 2.5-3.5 4.5-6.5 0.08-0.20
2205 (S32205) ≤ 0.03 ≤ 2.0 ≤ 1.0 ≤ 0.030 ≤ 0.020 22.0-23.0 3.0-3.5 4.5-6.5 0.14-0.20

Atlas 2205 complies with grade S31803 as well as grade S32205.

4.19.4 CONDITIONS OF SUPPLY – SPECIFIED MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
Values below are specified values according to ASTM A276, condition A, for cold finished bars.
Tensile Strength Yield Strength 0.2% Elongation Hardness
Grade
(MPa) min Proof (MPa) min (% in 50mm) min Rockwell C (HR C) Brinell (HB)
2205 655 450 25 31 max 293 max

4.19.5 CONDITION OF SUPPLY – TYPICAL PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

Elastic Mean Coefficient of Thermal Expansion Thermal Conductivity Specific Heat Electrical
Density
Modulus 0-100°C 0-315°C 0-538°C at 100°C at 500°C 0-100°C Resistivity
(kg/m³)
(GPa) (mm/m/°C) (mm/m/°C) (mm/m/°C) (W/m.K) (W/m.K) (J/kg.K) (nΩ.m)

7800 200 13.7 14.7 - 19.0 - 450 850

4.19.6 CORROSION RESISTANCE

Atlas 2205 possesses excellent general corrosion resistance; superior to Grade 316 in most
environments. Excellent resistance to localised corrosion including intergranular, pitting and crevice
corrosion; the CPT of 2205 is generally at least 35°C. The grade is also resistant to chloride stress
corrosion cracking (SCC) at temperatures of up to about 150°C. Grade 2205 will often perform well
in environments which cause premature failure of austenitic grades. It has better resistance to sea water
than grade 316. Consult Atlas Technical Assistance for specific environmental recommendations.
4.19.7 HEAT RESISTANCE
Although Atlas 2205 has good high temperature oxidation resistance this grade, like other duplex
stainless steels, suffers from embrittlement if held for even short times at temperatures above 300°C.
If embrittled this can only be rectified by a full solution annealing treatment. Duplex stainless steels
are almost never used above 300°C. 73
 ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

4.19.8 CONDITIONS OF SUPPLY – FINISH, DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES

4.19.8.1 Surface Finish
Round bar up to 25.4mm diameter is all cold drawn. Round bars over 25.4 and up to 127.00mm
diameter are smooth-turned and polished. Round bars over 127.00mm diameter are all peeled.
All hexagon bar and all square bar is cold drawn.
4.19.8.2 Diameter and A/F tolerances
Round Bar: Cold drawn h9; Smooth-turned and Polished h10; Peeled up to 160mm k12; Peeled
over 160mm +1.5mm/-0; Centreless ground h9 or h8
Square Bar: h11; Hex Bar: h11.
4.19.8.3 Straightness – maximum deviation from a straight line
Round Bar: 1.5mm in 1500mm and may not exceed: 1.5mm x length in mm / 1500mm
Squares and Hexagon: 1.5mm in 1500mm and may not exceed: 1.5mm x length in mm / 1500mm
Other tolerances may be supplied for more critical applications upon enquiry.
4.19.8.4 Length Tolerance
Sizes up to 25.4mm: Mill Lengths and Set Lengths, +50mm/-0
Sizes up from 25.4mm to 50.8mm: Mill Lengths and Set Lengths, +100mm/-0
Sizes over 50.8mm: Mill Lengths and Set Lengths, ± 300mm (varies depending on size)
4.19.9 HEAT TREATMENT
The following temperature ranges are applicable for the respective heat treatment operations.
Forging Annealing
900 – 1200°C 1010 – 1120°C

Cool rapidly after annealing. Atlas 2205 cannot be hardened by thermal treatment.
4.19.10 PROCESSING
The high strength that makes 2205 useful in many applications also reduces its machinability.
The high work-hardening rate further decreases the machinability of 2205. Cutting speeds are
approximately 20% slower than for a standard grade 304.
The high strength of 2205 also makes bending and forming more difficult; these operations will
require larger capacity equipment than would be required for austenitic stainless steels. The ductility
of 2205 is less than that of an austenitic grade (but is not low when compared to most other structural
materials), so severe forming operations, such as cold heading, are not generally possible. If severe
cold working is required it is recommended that intermediate annealing be carried out.
4.19.11 WELDING
Weldable by all standard methods, but should not generally be welded without filler metal as this may
result in excessive ferrite. AS 1554.6 pre-qualifies welding of 2205 with 2209 rods or electrodes
to ensure that deposited metal has the correctly balanced duplex structure. Nitrogen added to the
shielding gas will also assist in ensuring adequate austenite in the structure. Heat input must be kept
low and no pre- or post-heat should be used. The lower co-efficient of thermal expansion of all duplex
stainless steels compared with austenitic grades reduces distortion and associated stresses.
4.19.12 APPLICATIONS OF ATLAS 2205
Chemical processing, transport and storage. Oil and gas exploration and processing equipment. Marine
and other high chloride environments. Pulp & Paper digesters, liquor tanks and paper machines.
4.19.13 POSSIBLE ALTERNATIVE GRADES
Grade Why it may be chosen instead of Atlas 2205
904L Better formability is needed, with similar corrosion resistance and lower strength.
UR52N+ Higher resistance to corrosion is required, eg resistance to higher temperature seawater.
6%Mo Higher corrosion resistance is required, but with lower strength and better formability.
316L The high corrosion resistance and strength of 2205 are not needed… 316L is lower cost.
329 Similar corrosion resistance and mechanical properties but higher machinability.
74
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

4.20 ATLAS UR52N+: DUPLEX STAINLESS STEEL BAR

Colour Code: Violet
4.20.1 INTRODUCTION
Grade UR52N+ is a registered trade name of the Arcelor group, produced in a range of products,
and certified as compliant with EN10088-3 Grade 1.4507. UR52N+ retains the older designation
UNS S32550 for bar (in ASTM A276) despite the same grade in plate being designated (in ASTM
A240M) by the more appropriate UNS S32520. It is anticipated that in the future UR52N+ bar
will be re-classified as S32520.
UR52N+ is one of a group of “super duplex” grades, combining high strength with exceptional
corrosion resistance. Like other duplex (ferritic/austenitic) grades the super duplex grades are not
suitable for high or low temperature service. UR52N+ is not recommended for temperatures below
-50°C or above +270°C, because of reduced toughness outside this range.
The addition of copper to this grade gives it greatly improved resistance to strong reducing acids, particularly
sulphuric acid. UR52N+ is also very highly resistant to pitting/crevice corrosion in high chloride, hot
environments. Its duplex structure also results in excellent resistance to stress corrosion cracking.
4.20.2 RELATED SPECIFICATIONS
Euronorm
Grade UNS No British BS Swedish SS Japanese JIS
No Name
UR52N+ S32520 / S32550 - 1.4507 X2CrNiMoCuN25-6-3 - -

These comparisons are approximate only. The list is intended as a comparison of functionally
similar materials not as a schedule of contractual equivalents. If exact equivalents are needed
original specifications must be consulted.
4.20.3 CHEMICAL COMPOSITION
Specification values in %, according to EN10088-3, 1.4507
Grade C Mn Si P S Cr Mo Ni Cu N
UR52N+ 1.4507 ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ ≤ 24.0-26.0 2.7-4.00 5.5-7.5 1.00-2.50 0.15-0.30

4.20.4 CONDITIONS OF SUPPLY – SPECIFIED MECHANICAL PROPERTIES

Values below are specified in EN10088-3,1.4507.
Tensile Strength Yield Strength 0.2% Elongation Hardness
Grade
(MPa) min Proof (MPa) min (% in 50mm) min Rockwell C (HR C) Brinell (HB)
UR52N+ 1.4507 700-900 500 25 - 270

4.20.5 CONDITION OF SUPPLY – TYPICAL PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

Elastic Mean Coefficient of Thermal Expansion Thermal Conductivity Specific Heat Electrical
Density
Modulus 0-100°C 0-315°C 0-538°C at 100°C at 500°C 0-100°C Resistivity
(kg/m³)
(GPa) (mm/m/°C) (mm/m/°C) (mm/m/°C) (W/m.K) (W/m.K) (J/kg.K) (nΩ.m)
7800 205 13.5 14.0 14.5 17.0 - 450 850

4.20.6 CORROSION RESISTANCE

UR52N+ has excellent general corrosion resistance, superior to virtually all other stainless steels. It has
high resistance to intergranular corrosion and very high resistance to stress corrosion cracking in both
chloride and sulphide environments.
A PRE guaranteed to be at least 40 indicates that the material has good pitting and crevice corrosion
resistance to warm sea water and other high chloride environments; it is rated as more resistant than grade
904L and approaching that of the 6% Molybdenum “super austenitic” grades. The crevice corrosion
resistance of UR52N+ can be in excess of that of the 6% Mo grades in some cases. Copper adds resistance
to sulphuric and other reducing acids, particularly in the very aggressive “mid concentration” range.
The grade of choice for severe high temperature marine environments and for chemical and petrochemical
processing, including strong acids.
Consult Atlas Technical Assistance for specific environmental recommendations. 75
 ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

4.20.7 HEAT RESISTANCE

Although super duplex grades have good high temperature oxidation resistance, like other duplex
stainless steels they suffer from embrittlement if held for even short times at temperatures above
270°C. If embrittled this can only be rectified by a full solution annealing treatment.
4.20.8 CONDITIONS OF SUPPLY – FINISH, DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES
4.20.8.1 Surface Finish
Round bar up to 25.4mm diameter is all cold drawn. Round bars over 25.4 and up to 127.00mm
diameter are smooth-turned and polished. Round bars over 127.00mm diameter are all peeled.
All hexagon bar and all square bar is cold drawn.
4.20.8.2 Diameter and A/F tolerances
Round Bar: Cold drawn h9; Smooth-turned and Polished h10; Peeled up to 160mm k12; Peeled
over 160mm +1.5mm/-0; Centreless ground h9 or h8
Square Bar: h11; Hex Bar: h11.
4.20.8.3 Straightness – maximum deviation from a straight line
Round Bar: 1.5mm in 1500mm and may not exceed: 1.5mm x length in mm / 1500mm
Squares and Hexagon: 1.5mm in 1500mm and may not exceed: 1.5mm x length in mm / 1500mm
Other tolerances may be supplied for more critical applications upon enquiry.
4.20.8.4 Length Tolerance
Sizes up to 25.4mm: Mill Lengths and Set Lengths, +50mm/-0
Sizes up from 25.4mm to 50.8mm: Mill Lengths and Set Lengths, +100mm/-0
Sizes over 50.8mm: Mill Lengths and Set Lengths, ± 300mm (varies depending on size)
4.20.9 HEAT TREATMENT
The following temperature ranges are applicable for the respective heat treatment operations.
Forging Annealing
750 – 1150°C 1080 – 1120°C
Cool rapidly after annealing. Atlas UR52N+ cannot be hardened by thermal treatment.
4.20.10 PROCESSING
The high strength that makes UR52N+ useful in many applications also reduces its machinability.
The high work-hardening rate further decreases the machinability of UR52N+. Cutting speeds are
approximately 30% slower than for a standard grade 304. UR52N+ is a high strength steel, so
high forming forces will be required. The ductility of the grade is quite adequate for most operations,
but heavy deformation, such as cold forging, is not possible. If more than about 20% cold work is
required an intermediate solution anneal is required.
4.20.11 WELDING
Weldable by standard methods, without pre-heat. Consumables over-alloyed with nitrogen and nickel are
generally recommended. TIG (GTAW), MIG (GMAW) and all positional manual (MMAW) electrodes are
available. Nickel-based consumables (eg Alloy C22) give higher corrosion resisting welds. As for other
duplex stainless steels the coefficient of thermal expansion is lower than for austenitic grades, reducing
distortion and residual stresses. Post weld annealing increases the corrosion resistance of welds.
4.20.12 APPLICATIONS OF ATLAS UR52N+
Oil and gas exploration, processing and support systems, pollution control including flue gas
desulphurisation, marine and other high chloride environments, chemical processing, transport and
storage, pulp and paper processing.
4.20.13 POSSIBLE ALTERNATIVE GRADES
Grade Why it may be chosen instead of Atlas UR52N+
2205 The lower cost and better availability of 2205 are required, and a lower corrosion resistance and strength can be accepted.
Higher ductility of this austenitic grade is needed, and the much lower strength is acceptable. Corrosion
6% Mo
resistance is similar in many environments, but needs to be considered case by case.
76 Ni Alloys A corrosion resistance even higher than UR52N+ is required, and a higher cost structure is acceptable.
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

4.21 ATLAS 2011: ALUMINIUM MACHINING BAR

4.21.1 INTRODUCTION
Atlas 2011 is an aluminium alloy designed for high-speed machining with highest chipability of
all aluminium alloys due to the addition of lead and bismuth. 2011 can be hard anodised but is
not recommended for decorative anodising. Alloy 2011 is interchangeable with alloys 2017 and
2030. Alloy 2011 is heat treatable and has a high fatigue strength.

4.21.2 RELATED SPECIFICATIONS

AS 1865 / Euronorm 754 / 755 ASTM B211 /
Alloy UNS No
1866 No Name B221
2011 A92011 2011 3.1655 EN AW-2011 / AlCu6BiPb 2011

These comparisons are approximate only. The list is intended as a comparison of functionally
similar materials not as a schedule of contractual equivalents. If exact equivalents are needed
original specifications must be consulted.

4.21.3 CHEMICAL COMPOSITION

Specification values in %, according to AS1865/1866

Alloy 2011 Si Fe Cu Zn Pb Bi Others

min 5.0 0.2 0.2 each ≤ 0.05, total ≤ 0.15

max 0.4 0.7 6.0 0.30 0.6 0.6 each ≤ 0.05, total ≤ 0.15

4.21.4 TEMPER DESIGNATIONS AND DEFINITIONS

Product Temper Designation Definition

T3 Solution heat-treated, cold worked and naturally aged

2011 Cold drawn Solution heat-treated, cold worked and artificially aged to
T8
improve mechanical properties
2011 Extruded T6 Solution heat-treated and artificially aged

Atlas 2011 is stocked cold-drawn in temper T8 for sizes 5 – 9 mm diameter.

Atlas 2011 is stocked cold-drawn in temper T3 for sizes 10 – 55 mm diameter.
Atlas 2011 is stocked extruded in temper T6 for sizes over 55mm diameter.

4.21.5 SPECIFIED MECHANICAL PROPERTIES

Tensile Strength 0.2% Proof Elongation Typical
Temper Size range
(MPa) min Stress (MPa) min (% in 50mm) min Hardness (HB)
> 5≤ 40mm 320 270 10 115

T3 > 40 ≤ 50mm 300 250 10 110

> 50 ≤ 55mm 290 210 10 110

> 55 ≤ 125mm 310 230 8 110

T6
>125 ≤ 200mm 295 195 6 110

Tensile strength, proof stress and elongation are guaranteed values as specified by EN 754-2 for
cold drawn bar, resp. EN 755-2 for extruded bar. The requirements as per AS1865/1866 are
within the limits of EN 754/755. Typical hardness is quoted for indication purposes only.
77
 ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

4.21.6 TYPICAL PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

Elastic Thermal Electrical
Density Mean Coefficient of Thermal Specific Heat
Temper Modulus Conductivity Resistivity
(kg/m³) Expansion (mm/m/°C) (J/kg·K)
(GPa) (W/m·K) (nΩ·m)
T3 2840 72.5 23 152 863 44
T6 2840 72.5 23 172 863 38

4.21.7 CORROSION RESISTANCE AND ANODISING

Atlas 2011 is generally not recommended for applications involving corrosion without hard or
protective anodising. Corrosion performance in rural atmosphere is acceptable. Resistance to
exfoliation corrosion is acceptable for T3 and good T6.
Atlas 2011 is not recommended for bright or colour anodising. The product is suitable for protective
anodising and performs well with hard anodising.

4.21.8 CONDITIONS OF SUPPLY – FINISH, DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES

4.21.8.1 Surface Finish
Bars up to 55mm diameter are cold drawn. Bars with greater diameters are extruded.

4.21.8.2 Diameter and A/F tolerances

Product Temper Range Tolerance
> 6≤ 10mm -0.09/+nil
> 10 ≤ 18mm -0.11/+nil

T3 > 18 ≤ 30mm -0.13/+nil

> 30 ≤ 50mm -0.16/+nil
> 50 ≤ 55mm -0.19/+nil
> 55 ≤ 65mm ± 0.40
Round bar
> 65 ≤ 80mm ± 0.45
> 80 ≤ 100mm ± 0.55

T6 >100 ≤ 120mm ± 0.65

>120 ≤ 150mm ± 0.80
>150 ≤ 180mm ± 1.00
>180 ≤ 220mm ± 1.15
> 6 ≤ 10mm -0.09/+nil
>10 ≤ 18mm -0.11/+nil
Hexagonal bar T3
>18 ≤ 30mm -0.13/+nil
>30 ≤ 50mm -0.16/+nil
> 6≤ 10mm -0.09/+nil
> 10 ≤ 18mm -0.11/+nil

T3 > 18 ≤ 30mm -0.13/+nil

> 30 ≤ 50mm -0.16/+nil

Square bar > 50 ≤ 55mm -0.19/+nil

> 55 ≤ 65mm ± 0.50
> 65 ≤ 80mm ± 0.70
T6
> 80 ≤ 100mm ± 0.90
>100 ≤ 120mm ± 1.00

4.21.8.3 Straightness – maximum deviation from a straight line

Round, square and hexagonal cold-drawn bar and extruded bar up to 80mm: 0.6mm in any
300mm and may not exceed over total bar length: 2mm x length in metres.
Round, square and hexagonal extruded bar over 80mm up to 120mm: 1.0mm in any 300mm and
may not exceed over total bar length: 2mm x length in metres.
Round, square and hexagonal extruded bar over 120mm up to 200mm: 1.5mm in any 300mm
78 and may not exceed over total bar length: 3mm x length in metres.
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

4.21.8.4 Length Tolerance

Round, square and hexagonal bar:
Size up to 55mm (drawn): ± 7mm for bar length up to 5000mm
Size 60-100mm (extruded): + 7mm/-0 for bar length up to 5000mm
Size 100-200mm (extruded): + 9mm/-0 for bar length up to 5000mm

4.21.9 WELDING AND COLD FORMING

Atlas 2011 is not suitable for welding processes such as oxy-gas welding, MIG/TIG welding or
resistance welding. It cannot be brazed. It has acceptable soldering properties.
Atlas 2011 is not recommended to undergo any cold forming operations.

4.21.10 APPLICATIONS OF ATLAS 2011

General components such as screws, bolts, fittings, nuts, automatic lathe products. Auto fuel systems,
clock parts, gears and machine parts, pipe stems, TV fittings, camera parts, meter shafts, ordnance,
industrial connectors. Applications where good machinability and strength are required.

4.21.11 POSSIBLE ALTERNATIVE ALLOYS

Alloys Why it may be chosen instead of Atlas 2011

2030 When free machining alloy is required and better mechanical properties are needed than 2011 offers.
When alloy is needed with good machinability and similar mechanical properties as 2011, but good corrosions
6262
resistance and/or anodising properties and/or weldability are required as well.

79
 ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

4.22 ATLAS 6262: ALUMINIUM MACHINING BAR

4.22.1 INTRODUCTION
Atlas 6262 is an aluminium alloy designed for offering high machinability, good mechanical
properties and high corrosion resistance. Machinability of 6262 is significantly higher than that of
other 6000 series alloys like 6061 or 6082 and approaches the machinability of alloys like 2011
or 2030. Machined pieces easily obtain a smooth and bright finish. The mechanical, corrosion and
anodising properties are comparable to alloy 6061 and alloy 6082. Atlas 6262 can be protective
or hard anodised. It is also available in the 6262-ECO version with reduced lead content.
4.22.2 RELATED SPECIFICATIONS
Euronorm ASTM B211 /
Alloy UNS No AS 1865/1866
No Name B221
6262 A96262 6262 EN AW-6262 AlMg1SiPb 6262

These comparisons are approximate only. The list is intended as a comparison of functionally
similar materials not as a schedule of contractual equivalents. If exact equivalents are needed
original specifications must be consulted.
4.22.3 CHEMICAL COMPOSITION
Specification values in %, according to AS1865/1866
Alloy 6262 Si Fe Cu Mn Mg Cr Zn Ti Pb Bi Others
each ≤ 0.05,
Min 0.4 0.15 0.8 0.04 0.4 0.4 total ≤ 0.15
each ≤ 0.05,
Max 0.8 0.7 0.40 0.15 1.2 0.14 0.25 0.15 0.7 0.7 total ≤ 0.15

Alloy 6262-ECO Si Fe Cu Mn Mg Cr Zn Ti Pb Bi Others

each ≤ 0.05,
Min 0.6 0.2 0.6 0.4 total ≤ 0.15
each ≤ 0.05,
Max 1.4 0.7 0.50 1.2 1.2 0.30 0.30 0.20 0.4 2.0 total ≤ 0.15

There is no difference in the mechanical properties, corrosion resistance, anodising properties and
weldability of Atlas 6262 and Atlas 6262-ECO. The machinability of Atlas 6262-ECO is slightly
better than that of Atlas 6262.
4.22.4 TEMPER DESIGNATIONS AND DEFINITIONS
Product Temper Designation Definition
T9 Solution heat-treated, artificially aged and cold worked
6262 Cold drawn T91 Solution heat-treated, artificially aged and cold worked
T8 Solution heat-treated, cold worked and artificially aged
6262 Extruded T6 Solution heat-treated and artificially aged

Atlas 6262/6262-ECO is stocked in temper T9 for sizes 5 – 55mm diameter.

Atlas 6262/6262-ECO is stocked in temper T6 for sizes over 55mm diameter.
4.22.5 SPECIFIED MECHANICAL PROPERTIES FOR ATLAS 6262 AND ATLAS 6262-ECO
Tensile strength, proof stress and elongation are guaranteed values as specified by EN 754-2
(drawn bar) and EN 755-2 (extruded bar). Typical hardness is quoted for indication purposes only.
The mechanical properties as required by AS1865/1866 are within the limits of EN 754/755.
Tensile Strength 0.2% Proof Stress Elongation
Temper Size range Typical Hardness (HB)
(MPa) min (MPa) min (% in 50mm) min
T9 > 5 ≤ 50mm 360 330 4 110
T9 > 50 ≤ 55mm 345 310 4
T6 > 55mm 260 240 8

4.22.6 TYPICAL PHYSICAL PROPERTIES

Density Elastic Mod- Mean Coefficient of Thermal Thermal Cond- Specific Heat Electrical Resi
Temper
(kg/m³) ulus (GPa) Expansion (mm/m/°C) uctivity (W/m·K) (J/kg·K) -stivity (nΩ·m)
T9 2840 69.0 23.4 172 825 39

80 T6 2840 69.0 23.4 825

ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

4.22.7 CORROSION RESISTANCE AND ANODISING

Atlas 6262 is one of the most corrosion resistant aluminium alloys. Susceptibility to stress-corrosion cracking and
exfoliation is negligible. Galvanic corrosion can occur in the course of direct contact with dissimilar metals and this
should therefore be avoided. It has acceptable corrosion-resistance performance in marine environments too. Atlas
6262 is excellent for protective anodising, whilst it has good properties for hard and decorative anodising.
4.22.8 CONDITIONS OF SUPPLY – FINISH, DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES
4.22.8.1 Surface Finish
Bars up to 55mm diameter are cold drawn. Bars with greater diameters are extruded.
4.22.8.2 Diameter and A/F tolerances
Product Temper Range Tolerance
> 6≤ 10mm -0.09/+nil
> 10 ≤ 18mm -0.11/+nil

T9 > 18 ≤ 30mm -0.13/+nil

> 30 ≤ 50mm -0.16/+nil
> 50 ≤ 55mm -0.19/+nil
> 55 ≤ 65mm ± 0.40
Round bar
> 65 ≤ 80mm ± 0.45
> 80 ≤ 100mm ± 0.55

T6 >100 ≤ 120mm ± 0.65

>120 ≤ 150mm ± 0.80
>150 ≤ 180mm ± 1.00
>180 ≤ 220mm ± 1.15
> 6≤ 10mm -0.09/+nil
> 10 ≤ 18mm -0.11/+nil
Hexagonal bar T9
> 18 ≤ 30mm -0.13/+nil
> 30 ≤ 50mm -0.16/+nil
> 6≤ 10mm -0.09/+nil
> 10 ≤ 18mm -0.11/+nil

T9 > 18 ≤ 30mm -0.13/+nil

> 30 ≤ 50mm -0.16/+nil

Square bar > 50 ≤ 55mm -0.19/+nil

> 55 ≤ 65mm ± 0.50
> 65 ≤ 80mm ± 0.70
T6
> 80 ≤ 100mm ± 0.90
>100 ≤ 120mm ± 1.00

4.22.8.3 Straightness – maximum deviation from a straight line

Round, square and hexagonal bar: 0.6mm in any 300mm and may not exceed over total bar
length: 0.7mm x length in metres.
4.22.8.4 Length Tolerance
Round, square and hexagonal bar:
Diameter up to 55mm (drawn): ± 3mm for bar length up to 4000mm
Diameter 60-75mm (extruded): + 3mm/-0 for bar length up to 4000mm
Diameter over 75mm (extruded): + 5mm/-0 for bar length up to 4000mm
4.22.9 WELDING AND COLD FORMING
Atlas 6262 has excellent weldability and is suitable for all conventional welding processes. Best
results are achieved with MIG, TIG or resistance welding. It can be brazed very well.
4.22.10 APPLICATIONS OF ATLAS 6262
General components for automotive industry, such as transmission valves, brake pistons or air
conditioners, CATV connectors, camera parts, tripod fittings.
4.22.11 POSSIBLE ALTERNATIVE GRADES
Grade Why it may be chosen instead of Atlas 6262
6082 When machining properties can be sacrificed in return for further improved corrosion resistance
When alloy is needed with even better machinability and similar mechanical properties as 6262, and sacrifices
2011 are possible in corrosion resistance and/or anodising properties and/or weldability. 81
 5. NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTING OF ATLAS BAR PRODUCTS
5.1 HOW DOES ULTRASONIC INSPECTION WORK?

Ultrasonic inspection normally involves the use of a piezo electric transducer which is both a
transmitter and receiver of ultrasound. The transducer must be coupled to the item to be inspected,
as ultrasound at the frequency used is not transmitted in air. Coupling of the transducer to the item
under inspection may be achieved in two main ways: In the case of the contact inspection method
a coupling medium (oil or wall paper paste, or similar) is used. The other common process used is
immersion testing where the component or material under inspection is immersed in a water bath
and ultrasound is transmitted through the water and into the component. (Corrosion inhibitors are
normally added to the water bath where immersion testing is involved).

Back Wall Echo

Initial
Pulse

Flaw Echo

Defect

Back wall

Illustration of ultrasonic detection of

impurities in a steel bar
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

A proportion of the ultrasound is reflected back at interfaces such as the coupling medium /
material interface, but the majority of the ultrasound should ideally be transmitted into the material
/ steel under inspection. Ultrasound is reflected from the back surface (back wall) of the item under
inspection and off any planar discontinuities that may be present in the steel. (Note: to be able to
detect any the discontinuities present in the steel matrix the acoustic properties of the discontinuity
must be different to those of the defect free steel).
The transducer (as described above) comprises of a piezo electric crystal. Initially, the piezo
crystal converts electrical energy to ultrasound which is transmitted into the item under inspection.
Ultrasound reflected back to the crystal is then converted to electrical energy and this signal is
amplified, and in turn the signal is monitored on a cathode ray tube or digital display screen. The
time base can be calibrated providing information on the location of defects in relation to their
position between the front and back wall of the item under inspection. Also using relative reflectivity
(at known gain setting and beam path lengths) it is possible to determine the size of discontinuities
present. An experienced ultrasonic technician can accurately map the location, size and shape of
discontinuities that may be present. Based on the location, size, shape / geometry of a discontinuity
it may then be categorised as a defect
An analogy is sometimes used to help describe the ultrasonic test method. Imagine being in a
darkened room and a torch light producing a diverging beam of light is allowed to shine on a sheet
of A4 paper. Where the sheet of paper is presented at right angles to the diverging beam of light
more light energy is reflected backwards. If on the other hand the sheet of paper is placed in the
light beam and placed parallel to the diverging beam of light (i.e. edge on) then very little light
is reflected backwards. Similar principles apply to ultrasonic testing in that a diverging beam of
ultrasound is used and discontinuities that present themselves at right angles to the ultrasonic beam
may be detected (assuming a large enough reflectivity applies), while those that present themselves
with their plane parallel to the ultrasonic beam are very difficult or impossible to detect.
Therefore, scanning methods may involve the use of normal and / or shear wave probes. A normal
“0°” probe essentially directs ultrasound into the component under inspection normal to the surface
(i.e. at right angles to the surface). A shear wave probe on the other hand directs ultrasound into
the component at an angle. Common angles might be in the range 30° through to around 60°.
Ultrasound may be diffracted and bent as it moves between material having differing acoustic
attenuations, (this is similar to light through a prism). Also ultrasound changes velocity depending
on the material through which it is travelling. The formula V=fl, where V=velocity, f = frequency and
l = wavelength may be used by an ultrasonic technician. Ultrasonic probes are normally identified
with the following basic information: Frequency (MHz), Diameter and Angle. Please note that the
information provided above is not meant to be exhaustive, rather it is an introduction to the some of
the major principles of the ultrasonic test method.

5.2 WHY IS ULTRASONIC INSPECTION AN ISSUE?

All rolled and forged steel products contain microscopic discontinuities, such as non-metallic
inclusions. Volumetric discontinuities such as voids or cavities may also be present, originating from
shrinkage or gas porosity. In addition, surface discontinuities or defects such as cracks or seams
may be present, remnant from hot processing of billets or created during heat treatment.
The issue is: when does a discontinuity become a defect? Discontinuity size and shape, frequency of
occurrence, distribution and location all need to be considered. Rejection or acceptance of discontinuities
also depends on the application of the component. The loss of effective cross-section due to the presence
of any discontinuity, loss of strength due to fatigue, and implications of sudden impact are all relevant
considerations.
Ultrasonic inspection is a non-destructive testing method used to locate volumetric discontinuities
and to determine their size, geometry and frequency of occurrence. 85
 ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

5.3 ULTRASONIC INSPECTION OF ATLAS ALLOY BAR

Products benefiting from inspection: Atlas 4140, Atlas 4340, Atlas 6582, Atlas 6580, Atlas 6587,
Atlas 6657 and Atlas 8620H.

5.3.1 WHAT DOES IT MEAN?

• All alloy steel bar products that are sold from Atlas stock are ultrasonic inspected.
• Ultrasonic inspection has been performed in accordance with a defined standard.
• The inspection standard is explicit and transparent: AS 1065 to Level 2.
• AS1065 is the Australian Standard for “Non-Destructive Testing of Carbon and Low Alloy
Steel Forgings”.
• Level 2 refers to the precise inspection criteria.

5.3.2 WHY AS1065 LEVEL 2?

AS1065 defines the method of ultrasonic inspection. There are three inspection levels. The higher the
level (i.e. Level 1 is higher than Level 2 which in turn is higher than Level 3), the lower the frequency
and the smaller the size of the discontinuities allowed to be found by the ultrasonic inspection.
If a product meets AS1065 Level 2 it will be suitable for most general engineering applications. A
small number of applications will call for an even more stringent specification regarding ultrasonic
inspection; this can be carried out if requested.

5.3.3 WHAT ARE THE BENEFITS TO THE CUSTOMER?

• End user Quality of the Product is Guaranteed.
• Mill certificate based on test results is available, which can be submitted to the end user. The
mill certificate will state the Ultrasonic Test Method and Acceptance Criteria used.
• Reduction in the likelihood of incurring costs and loss of time where defects are found to be
present at the time of machining.
• Reduction in the likelihood of production time losses and the associated costs if a component
fails in service.

86
6. HEAT AND SURFACE TREATMENT OF STEELS 7. MACHINABILITY AND MACHINABILITY DATASHEETS
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

A large variety of heat treatments can be applied to steels - this feature is one of the reasons that
steels are such versatile engineering materials. The most common heat treatments are:

6.1 AS ROLLED & AS FORGED

Steel produced by hot rolling, and allowed to cool from the rolling temperature without strict control.
No separate heat treatment operation is applied, but this approximates a normalised condition.
Bars larger than about 250mm (it varies between steel mills) cannot be hot rolled to final size;
these are hot forged in a large forging press. Again the bars are shipped without subsequent heat
treatment. This condition is only used for steels destined for fairly non-critical applications.

6.2 ANNEALING
Full annealing:
- consists of heating the steel to its austenitizing temperature (approx 890°C for 0.2% carbon steel,
and 840°C for 0.4% carbon), holding it until temperature uniformity is achieved, and then cooling
slowly to a low temperature. The cooling rate is most critical through the transformation range
(around 850°C for a 0.2% carbon steel, and 815°C for 0.4%C). Cooling is usually in the furnace
and so the heat treatment cycle time is quite long.

Sub-critical annealing:
- (or stress-relief annealing) uses a lower temperature (typically 550 – 650°C) and shorter cycle time.
This operation is used when the heat treated component does not have to be in softest condition.
This treatment is to remove residual stresses remnant from heavy machining or other cold work.
Spheroidise annealing:
- is a treatment where the steel is held just below the lower critical temperature (around 700°C) for
a prolonged period, or alternatively heated and cooled to just above and just below the lower
critical temperature. This treatment is only used for steels requiring maximum ductility, such as
those for cold heading to make bolts.
Solution Treatment:
- The annealing process carried out on austenitic stainless steels; solution of all phases in the
material at a very high temperature (generally about 1050°C), followed by rapid cooling to
prevent precipitation.
Stabilisation Treatment:
- is an optional secondary treatment of stabilised austenitic stainless steels (grades 321, 347 and
316Ti) to ensure all carbon is precipitated as titanium or niobium carbides. The temperature is
about 820 – 900°C.

6.3 NORMALISING

Normalising is achieved by heating to a slightly higher temperature than annealing, and then
cooling a little quicker - generally in still air. The microstructure produced is a fine, fairly soft
structure of pearlite, and (depending upon carbon content) probably some ferrite. The result is a
slightly stronger and harder steel compared with the annealed alternative. In low carbon steels
normalising also results in a better machining steel compared with annealed.

89
 ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

6.4 HARDENING & TEMPERING

6.4.1 HARDENING
Hardening of steel is achieved by cooling quickly from the austenitising temperature (around 850°C
– 900°C). At this temperature the structure of most a steels is pure austenite. Most steels transform to
some other structure (or “phase”) when cooled from this temperature, depending upon the cooling
rate, and it is these phase changes that generate the various heat treated conditions. Only austenitic
stainless steels and austenitic manganese steels retain their austenitic structures when cooled down
to room temperature. They cannot be hardened by quenching.

The result of fast quenching of low alloy steels is a metallurgical structure called martensite, a very
hard but brittle phase. The hardness of a martensitic steel depends upon the alloy content – the most
significant element is the carbon content, with higher carbon content steels being able to be made
much harder, as shown in the graph below. Very low carbon martensites (less than about 0.1% C)
are relatively low hardness and quite tough. It follows that mild steel, or other low carbon steels,
cannot be hardened to high hardnesses. A medium carbon steel such as 4140 results in a hardness
of up to about Rockwell C 60 (60 HRC) in the fully hardened condition. Higher carbon contents – up
to about 1.0% C will result in as-quenched hardnesses of up to about 70 HRC. Cutting and metal
working tools are almost always made from high carbon steels, so that the required high hardness
can be achieved in heat treatment.

Hardness of Martensite
80

70
Rockwell Hardness C

60

50

40

30

20

10

0
0.00 0.20 0.40 0.60 0.80 1.00 1.20

Carbon (%)

The cooling (also called “quenching”) is carried out in various cooling media, with various cooling
rates achievable. Quenching into brine (salty water) results in a very fast cool, plain fresh water
gives a slightly slower cooling rate, and quenching into oil gives a slower rate again. Simply
removing the hot steel from the furnace and cooling it by blowing air past it is slower still. A polymer
quench is a synthetic water mix, with various cooling rates available.

“Hardenability” is the ability of a steel to be hardened through a section thickness. The graph
above assumes that the resulting microstructure is 100% martensite, but for each steel composition
90 there is a critical cooling rate which must be achieved if the structure is to be fully martensitic.
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

A slower cooling rate than critical will result in a mix of transformation products, possibly including
ferrite, pearlite and bainite in addition to martensite. Steels with high hardenability will transform
to 100% martensite at a slower cooling rate, and hence can be hardened through heavier sections
than can lower hardenability steels.
The hardenability of a steel is related primarily to its alloy content and grain size. Elements that
increase hardenability are chromium, manganese, molybdenum and vanadium. Carbon plays a large
part in determining hardness, but has only a minor effect on hardenability.

The standard test for measuring hardenability

of a steel is the Jominy test, shown in the
diagram. Drawing A shows the standard test
piece – a cylinder of steel with a slightly larger
diameter head at one end. The test is carried
out by heating this test piece to its austenitic
state, then dropping it into the apparatus
shown in Drawing B. A standard jet of water
directed at the bottom end of the test piece
quenches it in a controlled manner. After the
test piece is cooled to ambient a flat is ground
along its length, and hardness determined
every millimetre from the quenched end.
The results can be viewed in a table or more
usefully graphed to give a Jominy curve.
A steel with a higher hardenability will
harden further along the bar.

Hardenability of 4140
Typical values according to AS 1444

65

60
Rockwell Hardness (HRC)

55

50

45 max
min
40

35

30

25
0 1.5 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50

distance from quenched end (mm)

This test can also be used to specify hardenability of steel. Specifications for low alloy steels set
down limits for hardenability by defining a maximum and minimum hardness at each distance from
the quenched end, and the result is graphed as in the hardenability band for grade 4140. A Jominy
test for a Heat of 4140 should give results between the two lines plotted on this graph.

The results of this test also show what happens in the real heat treatment situation, where a bar is
quenched with the intention of fully hardening it; the Jominy curves show that steels with only small
alloying additions have low hardenability and so don’t harden far along the Jominy sample and
also do not harden through large bar diameters. 91
 ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

6.4.2 TEMPERING
Although as-quenched martensite is hard it is also quite brittle. The brittleness can be reduced (and
toughness increased) by “tempering” - a second heat treatment involving heating the hardened
steel to an intermediate temperature. This results in a trade-off between strength and toughness.
Tempering is almost always an essential second step … as-quenched martensite is usually too brittle
for practical service applications. The response of a quenched (fully martensitic) steel to tempering
is quite predictable; the higher the tempering temperature the more the hardness, tensile strength
and proof stress are reduced, and the more the toughness (impact), elongation and reduction of
area properties are increased. A tempering curve for low alloy steel 4140 is shown below.

This diagram indicates the typical mechanical properties (tensile strength, yield point or proof
stress, elongation, reduction of area and Izod or Charpy impact resistance) to be expected when
the steel is quenched from the correct hardening temperature and then tempered at the nominated
temperature. This diagram is typical for grade 4140, but compositional variations between
individual heats will have some influence on the outcome. Other conditions such as hardening
(austenitising) time and temperature and sample size also have an influence on the properties of
the tempered product. For many steels (including 4140) there is a substantial drop in Izod impact
strength in the range 200 to 450°C so this tempering range is usually avoided.

This data assumes that the steel is fully hardened, i.e. that it was quenched in the hardening heat
treatment sufficiently fast that the structure was converted to martensite right through to the centre.
A steel which is not cooled sufficiently fast transforms to some other products, in addition to martensite,
towards the bar centre. Such a structure is said to be “slack quenched”, and although it may exhibit
the same strength or hardness as a correctly hardened and tempered structure its toughness and
ductility will be inferior. If the component being produced is not able to be fully hardened through
the required section thickness, then another steel grade, with higher hardenability, should usually
be selected.

Tempering Diagram 4140

typical values for 30mm section
100

Tensile Izod
1600 Strength impact 90
Tensile Strength and 0.2% Proof Stress (MPa)

Elongation (A%), Reduction of Area (Z%)

80

1400
70
Proof
Stress
and Izod Impact (J)

Reduction 60
of Area
1200
50

40
1000

30

20
800

10
Elongation

600 0
400 500 600 700
92
Tempering Temp (∞C)
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

6.5 SURFACE HARDENING OF STEELS

A good combination for many high duty engineering components is a hard outside skin (case)
while still retaining a slightly softer, tougher inside (core). One of the main benefits of steel as an
engineering material is its capacity for surface hardening to give this combination of desirable
properties.
Induction and flame hardening of medium carbon steels are selective surface hardening processes
that result in a localised harden-and-temper; heat input is restricted to just the outer layer of the steel.
There is no change to the composition and no diffusion required. The processes can therefore be
very rapid.
Case hardening by contrast is a group of diffusion-based operations that change the composition of the
external component layer. Steels subjected to carburising, nitriding or similar processes have increased
carbon or nitrogen in their surfaces, and in fact are different steels at the surface compared to the
underlying core.

6.6 CASE HARDENING - CARBURISING

The hardness achievable by hardening and tempering a steel is very largely determined by its carbon
content (see previous graph). One way of achieving this mixture of properties is therefore to add
carbon to the case, usually by putting the steel in a furnace containing a high carbon content gas,
and then to harden and temper the component. The two operations – carburising and hardening &
tempering – should be seen as distinct, although in some instances the heat treatment is carried out
directly from the carburising temperature. Very high surface hardnesses (in excess of 60 HRC) can be
achieved by this carburising treatment.
This treatment is very widely used for gears. Steels used have low carbon content (typically 0.15
- 0.20%), and medium to high alloy content (eg Atlas 6587, 6657, 8620, En36A, En39B).
Carburising of the steel surface is most commonly carried out by pack or gas processes, although
liquid (salt bath), vacuum and plasma processes are also used. In any carburisation process the aim
is to drive carbon into the surface of a steel with originally a low carbon content, usually less than
0.25%, and to increase this to approximately 0.8 – 1.0% at the surface. The depth of this carburised
layer will depend upon the temperature, time of carburising, type of carburising cycle, carbon
concentration at the surface of the specimen and original composition of the steel. This is a diffusion
process, driven by concentration differences and very much time dependent. The processes achieve
a thin carburised layer very quickly, but because diffusion is the controlling mechanism it becomes
increasingly slow to achieve deeper cases.

6.6.1 PACK CARBURISING

In this process, the part that is to be carburised is packed in a steel container so that it is completely
surrounded by granules of charcoal. The charcoal is treated with an activating chemical such as
barium carbonate that promotes the formation of carbon dioxide. This gas in turn reacts with the
excess carbon in the charcoal to produce carbon monoxide, which reacts with the low-carbon
steel surface to form atomic carbon, able to diffuse into the steel. This carburising process does not
harden the steel, it only increases the carbon content to some depth below the surface, so that when
subsequent quenching is carried out the surface will achieve a high hardness.
It is difficult to quench components directly from the pack, as the sealed container has to be opened
and the parts extracted. It is more usual to slow cool the entire pack at the end of the carburisation
time and remove the part for separate hardening and tempering. This technique lends itself to
jobbing work, requires only basic heat treatment equipment and can carburise to a depth of up to
about 1.3mm. It is unsuitable for continuous production work, or for thin or closely controlled case
depths.
93
 ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

6.6.2 GAS CARBURISING

This process is commonly used for production carburising, and is well suited to continuous furnace
lines. The components are heated above the upper critical temperature (Ac3) in a furnace with an
atmosphere of carbon-containing gas such as methane, ethane, propane, natural gas, acetylene,
manufactured gas or mixed hydrocarbon gases. Most carburising gases are flammable and controls
are needed to keep this carburising gas at approximately 925°C from contacting oxygen. The
carburising gases are often diluted with an endothermic carrier gas, mainly nitrogen and carbon
monoxide along with smaller amounts of carbon dioxide, hydrogen and water vapour. The carrier
gas serves to control the amount of carbon supplied to the steel surface and prevents the formation
of soot residue. Control of the process is often by measurement of the dew point, related to the
water vapour content of the gas mixture.
As for pack carburising, the carbon monoxide (dissociated from the carbon-containing gas such as
methane) decomposes to atomic carbon which is able to diffuse into the steel.
Gas carburising allows more accurate control of the composition and depth of the case than does
pack carburising, and is more suited to continuous production. The equipment required however
is more sophisticated and specialised, and requires highly skilled operators. There are also safety
issues associated with the carburising gases – these can be explosive mixtures.
6.6.3 CARBURISING – HEAT TREATMENT
The second step of the case hardening process is heat treatment – a harden-and-temper operation
designed to produce the desired combination of properties in both the case and core.
Because the case and core have widely different carbon contents, they also have different
austenitising (“Ac3”) temperatures for hardening – ideally about 880°C for the core and 760°C for
the case. The ideal treatment is firstly to heat the steel to grain refine the core, followed by a water
quench and then a second heating to about 760°C followed by a second quench. The result of this
treatment is a case of fine-grained martensite surrounding a core of fine ferrite and bainite. A final
low temperature temper (160 – 220°C) will relieve any quenching stresses in the case.
A more economical heat treatment cycle is so-called direct hardening. This is particularly appropriate
for thin cases (up to 0.5mm) because the relatively short carburising time will not have produced
excessive grain growth. Here the components are quenched directly from the end of the carburisation
treatment, followed only by the temper.
An intermediate approach, suitable for intermediate depth cases, is to cool slowly from the carburising
temperature and then to re-heat to a compromise temperature of around 820°C, followed by a
water quench and then temper. This treatment results in slightly coarse-grained case and core, but
the properties are satisfactory for many applications.

6.7 NITRIDING
In this process atomic nitrogen is diffused into the steel surface, similar to the carbon diffusion
of carburising. The treatment temperature is much lower than for carburising, in the range 500
– 600°C, but for generally longer times – up to 100 hours, depending on the steel being treated
and the desired case depth. Under these conditions very hard nitrides form at and near the steel
surface. Steels suitable for nitriding contain the nitride-forming elements aluminium, chromium,
molybdenum or vanadium. Steels containing aluminium will form very hard but thin cases, while
those with chromium will form slightly softer and deeper nitrided cases. Plain carbon steels do not
respond well to nitriding.
As the nitriding temperature is comparatively low this treatment results in less distortion, and volume
changes are low because there is no phase transformation. The normal process is to harden and
temper the component first to achieve the required core properties, followed by machining and
finally nitriding.
94
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

Gas nitriding is usually carried out in an atmosphere of ammonia, which dissociates to nitrogen and
hydrogen at the treatment temperature. Over-nitriding results in a thick layer of iron nitrides on the
steel surface – called the “white layer” because of its appearance through a microscope. The white
layer has a detrimental effect on fatigue life so is usually either removed or the nitriding process
controlled to prevent its formation. Some proprietary nitriding processes have become available,
offering precise control over case depth and hardness and freedom from white layer.

6.7.1 CARBONITRIDING
This process involves the diffusion of both carbon and nitrogen into a steel surface, so combines
carburising and nitriding treatments. The process is performed in a gas furnace using a carburising
gas such as propane or methane, mixed with several percent of ammonia, which is a source of
nitrogen. The process is well suited to continuous furnace operation, and results in case hardnesses
of 60 – 65 HRC and depths of about 0.08 – 0.8mm. Carbonitriding is performed at 700 – 800°C,
followed by a quench into oil or by gas. Distortion is likely to be less than for carburisation but more
than nitriding. Unlike nitriding this process can be applied to plain carbon steels.

6.8 SELECTIVE SURFACE HARDENING

These processes do not change the surface composition but are in fact heat treatments confined to
local areas of the component. The surface – and usually only a small section of the component’s overall
surface – is austenitised and then rapidly quenched to produce martensite. The basic requirement
is that the steel have sufficient carbon and hardenability to achieve the required hardness at the
surface. Medium carbon steels are usually used. The processes are classified according to heat
source – the most commonly used are flame hardening and induction hardening, but there are also
applications using lasers and electron beams. In addition to increased wear resistance the surface
hardening also induces residual compressive stresses that result in improved bending and torsional
strength as well as increased fatigue properties. The component is first hardened and tempered (or
normalised) to achieve the required core properties, and the selected areas of the surface are then
austenitised and quenched. The final result is a core structure of tempered martensite (or ferrite /
pearlite if normalised) with a surface case of untempered martensite. The case is not as hard as in
a carburised steel because the carbon content of the surface is not as high.

6.9 FLAME HARDENING

The selected surface area is quickly heated by a gas flame. When the outside layer is heated above
its transformation temperature (austenitised) the component is quenched. The result is re-hardening
of the outer surface. Manually operated torches are useful for small areas such as the cutting edge
of a tool. The process can be automated for repetitive components, with torches arranged according
to the component shape. Symmetrical parts such as gears and shafts can be spun between centres
within a ring burner; the work piece rotates slowly and as soon as the surface has reached the
required austenitic state it is quenched either by complete immersion or by water jets adjacent to
the burner ring. Quenching of the surface layer is also assisted by “self quenching” – the inner core
of the component remains cold throughout, and its mass will quickly conduct heat from the outer
surface.

6.10 INDUCTION HARDENING

This process is the same as flame hardening except that an induction coil provides the heat to the
steel surface. The pattern of the heated region can be very precisely controlled by the shape of
the coil and also by the frequency of the alternating current in the coil; the higher the frequency
the shallower is the depth of penetration of the heating. Induction heating is highly suited to large
production runs of similar parts. Its advantages compared to flame hardening are rapid heating
rate, less component scaling, high production rate, very precise control over hardening location
and depth and low energy consumption.
95
6. HEAT AND SURFACE TREATMENT OF STEELS 7. MACHINABILITY AND MACHINABILITY DATASHEETS
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

7.1 MACHINING AND MACHINABILITY

In this section general guidelines are given for the machining of the bar product stocked and
marketed by Atlas Specialty Metals. This concerns carbon and alloy steels (section 7.2), stainless
steels (section 7.3) and aluminium alloys (section 7.4).
The term machinability includes all those properties which are relevant for the machining and
cutting process:

• the wear of tools

• the necessary cutting force
• the resulting form of the chips
• the quality of the surface produced

Machinability should not be regarded as a material property which can be expressed in a number
or a single parameter. It is a very complex technological construct. The machinability depends both
on the general physical and chemical properties of the material used, as well on the fabrication
process used to produce the material itself, hence we talk about IM or improved machinability
products that are produced in a way to make them more machinable.
The parameters influencing machinability and the outcome of the machining process are shown in
the figure below.

MACHINABILITY PARAMETERS

MACHINING INPUT
CHIP FORM SURFACE WEAR CUTTING FORCE
PARAMETER

PROCESS *** *** *** ***

MATERIAL *** ** *** **
CUTTING PARAMETERS
AND TOOL GEOMETRY ** *** *** **
MACHINE * *** ** *
TOOL MATERIAL * ** *** *

* = NOT SIGNIFICANT, ** = SIGNIFICANT, *** = VERY SIGNIFICANT

Process relates to the type of machining process (turning, milling, etc.) and the kinematical
arrangement of the tools, this is the most important element governing the outcome of a machining
operation. As mentioned, different materials vary in their machinability and the way they behave
under different cutting conditions. For example, stainless steels should be machined with high feed
rate and depth of cut in order to counter work-hardening that occurs. Aluminium alloys should
generally be machined with maximised surface speed in order to counter the tendency for build-
up on the cutting edge. Guidelines for “feeds and speeds” are given in the following sections.
Tool materials should carefully selected, matching the material that is to be machined. Here again
important differences exist between materials: coated carbide inserts work very well for carbon and
stainless steels but are not recommended for aluminium, as titanium (coating layer usually being
titanium nitride) has a chemical affinity for aluminium and will hence quickly dissipate and make
the tool surface softer. 99
 ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

7.2 MACHINING OF CARBON AND ALLOY STEEL

The cutting parameters given in this section are recommended ranges which have to be adapted to
the specific operating conditions which include factors like tool geometry, machine condition, length
and stability of the workpiece and coolant.

7.2.1 SPECIFIC CUTTING FORCE

The following table gives the specific cutting force for the various Atlas bar grades. Given the
horsepower of the machining equipment, specific cutting force can be used to determine the
maximum depth of cut or maximum feed rate that is achievable.

Product Specific Cutting Force (MPa)

Atlas M1020

Atlas M1030 2000 – 2200

Atlas 1045

Atlas 1214FM

Atlas 12L14FM 1800 – 2000

Atlas 4140

Atlas 6582
2600 – 2800
Atlas 4340

Atlas 6580 2800 – 3000

Atlas 8620H

Atlas 6587 2100 – 2300

Atlas 6657

Atlas U250 1100 – 1200

Atlas U400 1200 – 1400

7.2.2 TURNING
7.2.2.1 General Information
The main parameters of any turning operation and their interaction are shown in the diagram
below. tool
f : feed (mm/rev)

V : cutting speed (m/min)

Rotating
speed
ap : depth
of cut (mm)

Rate of metal removal (productivity):

Q = Vc . ap . f (mm3/min)
100
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

The rate of metal removal is one of the principal variables influencing overall productivity of the
turning operation.

The achievable rate of metal removal is limited by the amount of heat generated during the turning
operation. Research has shown that 99% of the energy that is put into the cutter, feed and speed
is transformed into the form of heat, mainly through deformation of the chip and friction between
the chip and the face of the tool. Therefore, the more energy that is put into the cut, the more heat
is produced. Generally coolants are used to dissipate the heat generated. Chips are cut from the
material which is slightly ahead of the front of the tool and this area is the primary shear zone.
The forces exerted by the cutter on to the workpiece create plastic deformation in this area, which
allows the material to yield to the cutter. Then there is a secondary shear zone that forms where
the chip slides up the face or front side of the cutting tool. This is the hottest area of the machining
operation and temperature in this area can rise to 1,200°C. A third shear zone is located under
the leading edge of the cutter. This zone is formed by springback material at the bottom of the cut
that was depressed as the primary shear zone yielded. These three areas of heat generation are
shown in the drawing below.

heat generation chip Cutting tool

: heat dissipation V
Shear plane Tool-chip interface

Heat Source Q

workpiece

Optimising the metal removal rate therefore needs to be balanced against the negative aspects of
excessive heat generation: shorter tool life and break-down of the tool. Generally, for carbon and
alloy steels this is less of an issue than for stainless steels, which have a very low thermal conductivity
and more heat tends to build up around the tool.

Contemporary tool making companies offer multi-layered inserts for improving its heat resistance.
Usually there is a top-layer of TiN (titanium-nitride) which enhances the frictional properties of the
insert surface. The second coating is made of aluminium-oxide (Al²O³). This coating protects against
excessive thermal overload.

Nickel and Molybdenum-containing alloy steels like Atlas 6582, Atlas 6587, Atlas 6580, Atlas
6657 and Atlas En39B, tends to show some work-hardening. This work-hardening is quite small
when compared to the work-hardening of austenitic stainless steels. Still, it is seen as advantageous
to select a depth of cut and feed rate to ensure that the actual cutting edge penetrates the material
past the hard zone. This should especially be borne in mind when machining alloy steels with
relatively high nickel content such as Atlas 6657 and Atlas En39B. 101
 ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

7.2.2.2 Turning-Machining Data Charts

The machining data are based on average conditions and usage of cold finished bar (esp. for
sections less than 100mm diameter). They are based on a planned tool life of 30 minutes with a
square insert geometry used as the reference.

Cutting Speed Coated

Product Depth of cut (mm) Feed rate (mm/rev) Tool
Carbide (m/min)

Atlas M1030 6 0.30 – 0.80 160 – 230 Roughing (P30-40)

Atlas M1020 2.5 0.20 – 0.50 180 – 260 Medium (P20-25)

Atlas 1045 0.5 0.05 – 0.25 230 – 380 Finishing (P10-15)

Cutting Speed Coated

Product Depth of cut (mm) Feed rate (mm/rev) Tool
Carbide (m/min)
6 0.30 – 0.80 180 – 260 Roughing (P30-40)
Atlas 1214FM
2.5 0.20 – 0.50 220 – 300 Medium (P20-25)
Atlas 12L14FM
0.5 0.05 – 0.25 280 – 450 Finishing (P10-15)

Cutting Speed Coated

Product Depth of cut (mm) Feed rate (mm/rev) Tool
Carbide (m/min)

Atlas 4140 6 0.30 – 0.80 90 – 140 Roughing (P30-40)

Atlas 6582 2.5 0.20 – 0.50 100 – 170 Medium (P20-25)

Atlas 4340 0.5 0.05 – 0.25 150 – 210 Finishing (P10-15)

Cutting Speed Coated

Product Depth of cut (mm) Feed rate (mm/rev) Tool
Carbide (m/min)
6 0.30 – 0.80 55 – 95 Roughing (P30-40)

Atlas 6580 2.5 0.20 – 0.50 75 – 130 Medium (P20-25)

0.5 0.05 – 0.25 115 – 160 Finishing (P10-15)

Cutting Speed Coated

Product Depth of cut (mm) Feed rate (mm/rev) Tool
Carbide (m/min)

Atlas 8620H 6 0.30 – 0.80 100 – 180 Roughing (P30-40)

Atlas 6587 2.5 0.20 – 0.50 150 – 210 Medium (P20-25)

Atlas 6657 0.5 0.05 – 0.25 200 – 320 Finishing (P10-15)

Cutting Speed Coated

Product Depth of cut (mm) Feed rate (mm/rev) Tool
Carbide (m/min)
2 0.30 – 0.80 130 – 200 Medium (K15-25)
Atlas U250
0.5 0.05 – 0.4 175 – 300 Finishing (K10-15)

Cutting Speed Coated

Product Depth of cut (mm) Feed rate (mm/rev) Tool
Carbide (m/min)
2 0.30 – 0.80 110 – 180 Medium (K15-25)
Atlas U400
0.5 0.05 – 0.4 140 – 240 Finishing (K10-15)

102
AATLAS
TLAS SPSPECIALTY METALS
ECIALTY META ♦ TECHNICAL
LS � Technical Handbook of HANDBOOK
Bar Products OF BAR PRODUCTS

A7.2.3
TLASMILLING
SPECIALTY METALS � Technical Handbook of Bar Products
7.2.3 MILLING
7.2.3.1 General Information:
7.2.3.1 General Information:
The
T.L3 Afollowing
SMSILPLIENC formula are applicable to milling operations.
A
7.2 GIALTY METALS � Technical Handbook of Bar Products
The following formula are applicable to milling operations.
7.2.3.1 General Information:
AMetal
TLASremoval
SPECIArate
LTY METALS � Technical Handbook of Bar Products
Metal
7.2.3 removal
MILLINrate
G
The following formula are applicable to milling operations.

7
Q
7.2.3.1 =General
.2.3 removal
ae ·Information:
MILLING
ap · vf (mm3/min)
Metal MILLINrate
G
The following formula are applicable to milling operations.
3
Q =General
7.2.3.1
aea=e radial
·Information:
ap depth
· vf of cut(mm
(mm) /min)
Metal removalarate
p = axial depth of cut (mm)
The following formula are applicable to milling operations.
vf = table travel (mm/min) 3
Q = aea=e radial
Metal removal rate
· a p · v
depth
f (mm
of cut (mm) /min)
ap = axial depth of cut (mm)

Cutting Q =avfea==etable
speed · aptravel
radial · vf (mm/min)
depth (mm
of cut
3
(mm) /min)
ap = axial depth of cut (mm)
Cutting vn = ·table
D travel (mm/min)
Cutting =speed
vcspeed afe = radial depth(m/min)
of cut (mm)
a318
p = axial depth of cut (mm)
vn
f = ·table
D travel (mm/min)
v =n = revolutions per(m/min)
Cutting cspeed
318 minute (rev/min)
D = diameter of the cutter (mm)
n·D
vc =n = revolutions per(m/min)
Cutting speed
minute (rev/min)
318
Feed speed (ornTable
· Dtravel speed)
D = diameter of the cutter (mm)
vc = (m/min)
n =318
revolutions per minute (rev/min)
vf = (or
Feed speed Dn=Table
·diameter
z travel
· fz speed)
(mm/min)
of the cutter (mm)
n = revolutions per minute (rev/min)
Feedvfspeed
= Dn==Table
·RPM
zTable
· (rev/min)
fz travel
(mm/min)
n diameter of the cutter (mm)
Feed speed (or
(or travel speed)
speed)
z = number of teeth
fz = feed per tooth (mm)
n = RPM (rev/min)
vf = (or
Feed speed n Table
· z travel
· f speed)
z = numberzof teeth
(mm/min)
fz = feed per tooth (mm)
vf revolution
Feed per = nn= ·RPM z · (rev/min)
fz (mm/min)
z = number of teeth
fz = feed per tooth (mm)
f = nzz==·number
RPM (rev/min)
Feed per revolution
fz (mm/rev)
of teeth
fzz==feed per tooth
number (mm)
of teeth
f = zfz ·= ffeed
Feed per revolution
z per (mm/rev)
tooth (mm)

z = number of teeth
Feedperper
Feed revolution
revolution
f= zfz ·= ffeed (mm/rev)
z per tooth (mm)

f = zzfz =·= number

ffeed of teeth
(mm/rev)
z per tooth (mm)
z = number of teeth
fz = feed per tooth (mm) Page 103
www.atlasmetals.com.au

Page 103
www.atlasmetals.com.au 103
 ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

7.2.3.2 Milling - Machining Data Charts

For cutters with indexable carbide inserts.

Cutting Speed Coated

Product Operation Feed per tooth (mm/rev) Tool
Carbide (m/min)

Atlas M1030 Roughing 0.15 – 0.5 120 – 180 Roughing (P20-35)

Atlas M1020
Atlas 1045 Finishing 0.05 – 0.20 160 – 260 Finishing (P10-15)

Cutting Speed Coated

Product Operation Feed per tooth (mm/rev) Tool
Carbide (m/min)

Atlas 1214FM Roughing 0.15 – 0.5 140 – 220 Roughing (P20-35)

Atlas 12L14FM Finishing 0.05 – 0.20 190 – 310 Finishing (P10-15)

Cutting Speed Coated

Product Operation Feed per tooth (mm/rev) Tool
Carbide (m/min)

Atlas 4140 Roughing 0.15 – 0.5 90 – 140 Roughing (P20-35)

Atlas 6582

Atlas 4340 Finishing 0.05 – 0.20 110 – 180 Finishing (P10-15)

Cutting Speed Coated

Product Operation Feed per tooth (mm/rev) Tool
Carbide (m/min)

Roughing 0.15 – 0.5 60 – 80 Roughing (P20-35)

Atlas 6580
Finishing 0.05 – 0.20 90 – 150 Finishing (P10-15)

Cutting Speed Coated

Product Operation Feed per tooth (mm/rev) Tool
Carbide (m/min)

Atlas 8620H Roughing 0.15 – 0.5 100 – 170 Roughing (P20-35)

Atlas 6587

Atlas 6657 Finishing 0.05 – 0.20 150 – 240 Finishing (P10-15)

Cutting Speed Coated

Product Operation Feed per tooth (mm/rev) Tool
Carbide (m/min)

Roughing 0.20 – 0.5 130 – 170 Roughing (K15-25)

Atlas U250
Finishing 0.05 – 0.20 170 – 250 Finishing (K10-15)

Cutting Speed Coated

Product Operation Feed per tooth (mm/rev) Tool
Carbide (m/min)

Roughing 0.20 – 0.5 120 – 150 Roughing (K15-25)

Atlas U400
Finishing 0.05 – 0.20 140 – 220 Finishing (K10-15)
104
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS � Technical Handbook of Bar Products

7.2.4 DRILLING
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS � Technical Handbook of Bar Products
77.2.4.1
.2.4 DRGeneral
ILLING Information
The main formulas for drilling operations are the following:
A T.L4 ASDS
7.27.2.4.1
PLE CIALInformation
RIGeneral
LING
TY METALS � Technical Handbook of Bar Products
The main formulas for drilling operations are the following:
Cutting speed
Cutting
7 DRIGeneral
.27.2.4.1
.4 speedLLING Information
The main formulas for drilling operations are the following:
n·D
vc =
Cutting
7.2.4.1speed
General Information (m/min)
318
The main formulas for drilling operations are the following:
n·D
vcspeed
Cutting = (m/min)
n =318
revolutions per minute (rev/min)
Dn = diameter
· D of the drill (mm)
vc =n = revolutions per(m/min) minute (rev/min)
318
D = diameter of the drill (mm)
Feed speed
n = revolutions per minute (rev/min)
vfspeed
= Dn=·diameter
Feedspeed
Feed f (mm/min)
of the drill (mm)

v = nn= ·RPM
f
Feed speed
f (rev/min)
(mm/min)
f = feed per rev. (mm/rev)

vf = nf n==feed
·RPM (rev/min)
f per(mm/min)
rev. (mm/rev)

n =Rate
Metal Removal RPM (rev/min)
f = feed per rev. (mm/rev)
Q = 250 · D · f · vc
Metal Removal Rate
(mm3/min)
3
Q = 250 ·D·f ·v
Rate of the cdrill (mm)
D = diameter
Metal Removal
(mm /min)
Metal Removal Rate
f = feed per rev. (mm/rev)
vc = cutting speed (m/min)
Q = 250 (mm3/min)
· D · fof ·thevcdrill (mm)
D = diameter
f = feed per rev. (mm/rev)
vc = cutting speed (m/min)
D = diameter of the drill (mm)
f = feed per rev. (mm/rev)
vc = cutting speed (m/min)

Page 105
www.atlasmetals.com.au
Page 105 105
www.atlasmetals.com.au
 ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

7.2.4.2 Drilling – Machining Data Charts

Standard drilling parameters for SOLID CARBIDE drills, for drilling with internal coolant supply
and P25-P40/K40 type tool. Feed rates for drill diameter 7-10mm and up represent the middle of
a range.

Cutting Speed Feed Rate (mm/rev) for various drill diameters (mm)
Product
(m/min) 2-3 4-6 7-10 11-15 16-20 21-32

Atlas M1020

Atlas M1030 70 – 90 0.03 – 0.06 0.10 – 0.15 0.20 0.30 0.35 0.40

Atlas 1045

Atlas 1214FM
90 – 110 0.03 – 0.06 0.10 – 0.15 0.20 0.30 0.35 0.40
Atlas 12L14FM

Atlas 4140

Atlas 6582 50 – 60 0.03– 0.06 0.05 – 0.11 0.16 0.22 0.25 0.28

Atlas 4340

Atlas 6580 35 – 45 0.03– 0.06 0.04 – 0.10 0.14 0.20 0.23 0.28

Atlas 8620H

Atlas 6587 60 – 80 0.03– 0.06 0.06 – 0.13 0.18 0.25 0.30 0.35

Atlas 6657

Atlas U250 80 – 100 0.08– 0.12 0.18 – 0.25 0.30 0.35 0.40 0.50

Atlas U400 60 – 80 0.08– 0.12 0.18 – 0.25 0.25 0.30 0.35 0.45

Standard drilling parameters for INDEXABLE CARBIDE INSERT drills, for drilling with external
coolant supply and P25-P40/K40 type tool.
Feed Rate (mm/rev) for various drill diameters (mm)
Product Cutting Speed (m/min)
< 25 25 – 40 > 40

Atlas M1020

Atlas M1030 150 – 270 0.05 – 0.10 0.08 – 0.18 0.10 – 0.20

Atlas 1045

Atlas 1214FM
180 – 330 0.05 – 0.10 0.08 – 0.18 0.10 – 0.20
Atlas 12L14FM

Atlas 4140

Atlas 6582 110 – 210 0.05 – 0.10 0.08 – 0.15 0.10 – 0.20

Atlas 4340

Atlas 6580 110 – 180 0.05 – 0.10 0.08 – 0.15 0.10 – 0.20

Atlas 8620H

Atlas 6587 130 – 240 0.05 – 0.12 0.08 – 0.16 0.10 – 0.20

Atlas 6657

Atlas U250 80 – 180 0.09 – 0.15 0.14 – 0.25 0.18 – 0.30

Atlas U400 80 – 180 0.09 – 0.15 0.14 – 0.24 0.15 – 0.28

106
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

7.2.5 PARTING-OFF
Surface Speed (m/min) for various feed rates (mm/rev)
Product
0.05 – 0.10 0.10 – 0.25

Atlas M1020

Atlas M1030 140 – 180 110 – 150

Atlas 1045

Atlas 1214FM
160 – 220 130 - 170
Atlas 12L14FM

Atlas 4140

Atlas 6582 90 – 120 80 – 100

Atlas 4340
Atlas 6580 70 – 90 60 – 80
Atlas 8620H

Atlas 6587 120 – 150 100 - 140

Atlas 6657
Atlas U250 120 – 160 100 – 140
Atlas U400 110 – 150 90 – 130

7.2.6 SURFACE FINISH

Surface finish is a characteristic of any machined surface. It is sometimes called surface texture or
roughness. What the surface finish of a work piece should be, is based on what the component is
supposed to do. The surface finish specification is relevant for the following considerations:
Good surface finishes achieve high efficiency. High quality surface finishes coupled with micron fit
will produce less friction. For example a 75HP piston engine can loose up to 5HP to the friction of
the connecting rods, crank, and piston unless high quality finishes are applied.
• Good surface finishes increase the wear resistance of two work pieces in an assembly.
• Good surface finishes reduce the friction between two work pieces in an assembly.
• Good surface finishes have a cosmetic effect and make parts “look good”.
• Good surface finish permits the proper function of static and dynamic o-ring seals in
hydraulic and pneumatic equipment.
The following graph shows the meaning of surface roughness as the primary, measurable indicator
for surface finish.
ROUGHNESS
WAVINESS HEIGHT
HEIGHT

ROUGHNESS
CUTOFF LENGTH SPACING

WAVINESS SPACING
Deviation of surface shape from a straight line can be classified into two groups:
• Waviness • Roughness
Waviness refers to a low frequency wave-like pattern in the surface as shown in the picture above.
Once the wave pattern is filtered out surface roughness is the deviation of the actual surface from a
reference line. The so called cut-off length is used to discriminate between waviness and roughness,
a common cut-off length for industrial purposes is 0.8mm. 107
 ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

Surface roughness is most commonly measured as ARITHMETIC AVERAGE ROUGHNESS or Ra.

Ra is calculated by taking the average of a large number of measured distances from the reference
line.
In machining the theoretically achievable surface finish is determined by the nose radius of the tool
and the feed rate. In machining practice, many other factors will influence the achieved surface
finish, all related to the vibrations that are generated in the workpiece and the tool during the finish
machining operation. For carbon and alloy steels (low cold-work hardening), the general rules are
the following:
•the larger the nose radius, the better the surface finish
•the lower the feed rate, the better the surface finish
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS � Technical Handbook of Bar Pr
Generally, feed rate should not be higher than 1/2 of the nose radius and for a very good surface
finish 1/4 of the nose radius is recommended. The effect of increasing feed rate is stronger than the
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS � Technical Handbook of Bar Products
effect of increasing nose radius. In other words, the adverse effect on surface finish of doubling the
feed rate will not be offset by using a tool with a double nose radius.
7.2.6.1 Theoretical surface finish for milling operations:
The following formulas show how the theoretical surface finish can be calculated.
Theoretical surface finish for milling
 f milling
 for
2 
7.2.6.1operations:
Theoreticalsurface finish
2  operations:
r − r −   ×1000
  2   2 

 r −Ra r=2 −  f   ×1000 
 2  2
Ra =  
Ra = surface 2 roughness in µm (micrometers or microns)
r = nose radius of the tool in mm
Ra = surface roughness in µm
Ra f
=rsurface =
= nose radius feed
roughness rate
of the in
tool
in µmmm/rev
in (micrometers
mm f = feed
or rate in mm/rev
microns)
(micrometers or microns)r = nose radius of the tool in mm
f = feed rate in mm/rev
Theoretical surface finish for turning operations:
7.2.6.2 Theoretical surface finish for turning operations:
2
7.2.6.2
× 1000
f
Theoretical surface finish for turning operations:
Ra =
(24 x r)
f × 1000(24 × r)
2

Ra =
Ra = surface roughness in µm r Ra (24 × r)
= nose =radius of the
surface tool in mmin µm f = feed rate in mm/rev
roughness
Note: to convert micrometer into microinch, multiply
r by 39.4;=tonose
convert microinch
radius of theinto
toolmicrometer
in mm multiply by 0.0254.
Ra reference
= surface f
roughness = feed rate in mm/rev
in µmand turning operations at various
The following table gives some values Ra for milling
feed rates and nose radiuses.
r = nose radius of the tool in mm
Note: to convert micrometer into microinch, multiply by 39.4; to convert mic
f = feed rate in mm/rev
by 0.0254.
Theoretical Surface Finish Ra (µm)

Turning
Note:Operation
to convert micrometer into microinch, Milling
multiplyOperation
by 39.4; to convert microinch into
Feed rate The following table gives some reference values Ra for milling and turning o
by radius
Nose 0.0254.(mm) Nose radius (mm)
(mm/rev) and nose radiuses.
0.4 0.8 1.2 1.6 0.4 0.8 1.2 1.6
The following table gives some reference values Ra for milling and turning operations
0.05 0.26 0.13
and nose 0.09
radiuses. 0.07 0.39 0.20 0.13 0.10
Theoretical Surface Finish Ra (µm)
0.10 1.04 0.52 0.35 0.26 1.57 0.78 0.52 0.39
0.15 2.34 1.17 0.78 0.59 3.55 1.76 Operation
Turning 1.17 0.88 Milling
Theoretical Surface Finish Ra (µm)
0.20 4.17 2.08 1.39 1.04
Feed rate 6.35 Nose
3.14radius (mm)
2.09 1.56 Nose r
0.25 3.26 2.17 (mm/rev)
1.63 4.91 3.26 2.45
Turning Operation
0.4 0.8 1.2 1.6 Milling Operation
0.4 0.
0.30 4.69 3.13
Feed rate 2.34 7.09
Nose radius (mm) 4.71 3.52
Nose radius (mm)
0.40 8.33 (mm/rev)
5.56 0.05
4.17 0.26 0.13
12.70 0.09
8.39 0.07 6.27 0.39 0.2
0.50 8.68 0.100.4
6.51
0.8
1.04 1.2
0.52 1.6
0.35 0.4
13.17 0.26 9.83 1.57
0.8 0.71
108
0.05 0.15
0.26 2.34
0.13 1.17
0.09 0.78
0.07 0.59
0.39 3.55
0.20 1.7
0.1
 Theoretical Surface Finish Ra (µinch)

ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

Turning Operation Milling Operati
Feed rate
Nose radius (mm) Nose radius (m
(mm/rev)
0.4
Theoretical Surface 0.8Ra (µinch)1.2
Finish 1.6 0.4 0.8
0.05Operation
Turning 10.3 5.1 3.4 Milling 2.6
Operation15.4 7.7
Feed rate 0.10
Nose radius (mm) 41.0 20.5 13.7 Nose 10.3
radius (mm)61.8 30.8 2
(mm/rev)
0.15 92.3 46.1 30.8 23.1 139.6 69.4 4
0.4 0.8 1.2 1.6 0.4 0.8 1.2 1.6
0.20 164.0 82.0 54.7 41.0 250.0 123.5 8
0.05 10.3 5.1 3.4 2.6 15.4 7.7 5.1 3.8
0.25 128.2 85.4 64.1 193.4 12
0.10 41.0 20.5 13.7 10.3 61.8 30.8 20.5 15.4
0.30 184.5 123.0 92.3 279.3 18
0.15 92.3 46.1 30.8 23.1 139.6 69.4 46.2 34.6
0.40 328.1 218.7 164.0 500.1 33
0.20 164.0 82.0 54.7 41.0 250.0 123.5 82.2 61.6
0.25
0.50
128.2 85.4 64.1
341.8 193.4
256.3 128.5 96.3
51
0.30 184.5 123.0 92.3 279.3 185.3 138.7
0.40 328.1 218.7 164.0 500.1 330.4 247.0
0.50 341.8 256.3 518.3 386.8
7.2.7 SURFACE SPEED – RPM CONVERSION CHART
7.2.7 SURFACE SPEED – RPM CONVERSION CHART
Revolutions
Revolutions per minute (RPM) for per minute
selected (RPM) for
diameters andselected
cutting diameters
speeds and cutting speeds
Component Or Cutter Cutting Speed (m/min)
Cutting Speed (m/min)
Diameter (mm) 40 C o m p 50
onent 75 100 150 200 300 400 500
Or Cutter Diameter
10 1275 1595 2390 3185 4780 6370 9555 12740 15925
(mm) 40 50 75 100 150 200
15 850 1065 1595 2125 3185 4250 6370 8495 10620
10 1275 1595 2390 3185 4780 6370 9
20 640 800 1195 1595 2390 3185 4780 6370 7965
15 850 1065 1595 2125 3185 4250 6
25 510 640 960 1275 1915 2550 3825 5100 6370
20 640 800 1195 1595 2390 3185 4
30 425 535 800 1065 1595 2125 3185 4250 5310
25 510 640 960 1275 1915 2550 3
40 320 400 600 800 1195 1595 2390 3185 3985
50 255
3 0
320 480
425
640
535
960
800
1275
1065
1915
1595
2550
2125
3185
3
63 205 4255
0 380 320
510 400
760 600
1015 800
1520 1195
2025 1595
2530 2
80 160 5 0
200 300 255
400 320
600 480
800 640
1195 960
1595 1275
1995 1
100 130 6 3
160 240 205
320 255
480 380
640 510
960 760
1275 1015
1595 1
125 105 8 0
130 195 160
255 200
385 300
510 400
765 600
1020 800
1275 1
150 85 10110
0 160 130
215 160
320 240
425 320
640 480
850 640
1065
175 75 1295
5 140 105
185 130
275 195
365 255
550 385
730 910510
200 65 1580
0 120 85
160 110
240 160
320 215
480 320
640 800425
250 55 1765
5 100 130
75 195
95 255
140 385
185 510
275 640365
300 45 2055
0 80 110
65 160
80 215
120 320
160 425
240 535320

250 55 65 100 130 195 255

300 45 55 80 110 160 215

Relatedformula
Related formula

n = 318 · vc
D
vc = cutting speed (m/min)
n = revolutions per minute (rev/min)

109
 ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

7.3 MACHINING OF STAINLESS STEEL

7.3.1 UGIMA® 303
UGIMA® 303 = UGIMA®NSU = UGIMA®4305
C = 0.10 % max Cr = 17.0 – 19.0 % Ni = 8.0 – 10.0 % Mn = 2 % max S = 0.25 – 0.35 %

Conforms to standards: ASTM A276 Grade 303 – EN 10088–3 : 1.4305 X8CrNiS18–9 – AISI 303
7.3.1.1 Cutting parameters for classical machines, multi–spindle, single–spindle screw machine:
* Second choice possible HSS Tools Carbide tool
Machining Depth of cut Cutting speed Feed Type Cutting speed Feed Type of
operation or width (mm) (m/min) (mm/rev) of tool (m/min) (mm/rev) tool
1 45.5 – 55.5 0.13–0.2 145 – 215 0.13–0.2 P10-M10
Ø Bar ≤
2 39.5 – 45.5 0.15–0.25 120 – 155 0.15–0.25 P20-M20
25.4mm 3 33.5 – 42.5 0.17–0.30 S4–S5 120 – 145 0.17–0.30 P25-M20

TURNING 1 48.5 – 57.5 0.13–0.2 (S9) 160 – 275 0.13–0.2 P10-M10

2 42.5 – 51.5 0.15–0.25 140 – 250 0.15–0.25 P20-M20
Ø Bar > 25.4mm
3 36.5 – 45.5 0.17–0.30 130 – 225 0.17–0.30 P25-M20
2 42.5 – 54.5 0.08 – 0.10 130 – 140 0.08 – 0.10 P20-M20
6 39.5 – 51.5 0.08 – 0.10 105 – 130 0.08 – 0.10 P20-M20
Ø Bar ≤ 12.7 39.5 – 48.5 0.07 – 0.09 105 – 130 0.07 – 0.09 P25-M20
25.4mm 25 39.5 – 48.5 0.07 – 0.09 105 – 130 0.07 – 0.09 P25-M20
51 39.5 – 48.5 0.065–0.085 S4–S5 105 – 120 0.065–0.085 P25-M20
FORMING–
2 45.5 – 57.5 0.09 – 0.11 (S9) 135 –170 0.09 – 0.11 P20-M20
GROOVING 6 42.5 – 54.5 0.09 – 0.11 120 – 140 0.09 – 0.11 P20-M20
Ø Bar > 25.4mm 12.7 42.5 – 51.5 0.08 – 0.10 120 – 130 0.08 – 0.10 P25-M20
25 42.5 – 51.5 0.08 – 0.10 115 – 130 0.08 – 0.10 P25-M20
51 42.5 – 51.5 0.07 – 0.09 115 – 130 0.07 – 0.09 P25-M20

2 42.5 – 54.5 0.03 – 0.045 130 – 140 0.03 – 0.045 P20-M20

6 39.5 – 51.5 0.04 – 0.06 105 – 130 0.04 – 0.06 P20-M20
Ø Bar ≤ 12.7 39.5 – 48.5 0.045–0.065 105 – 130 0.045–0.065 P25-M20
25.4mm 25 39.5 – 48.5 0.045–0.065 105 – 130 0.045–0.065 P25-M20
51 39.5 – 48.5 0.04 – 0.06 S4–S5 105 – 120 0.04 – 0.06 P25-M20
SHAVING–
2 45.5 – 57.5 0.03 – 0.045 (S9) 135 –170 0.03 – 0.045 P20-M20
SKIVING 6 42.5 – 54.5 0.04 – 0.06 120 – 140 0.04 – 0.06 P20-M20
Ø Bar > 25.4mm 12.7 42.5 – 51.5 0.045–0.065 120 – 130 0.045–0.065 P25-M20
25 42.5 – 51.5 0.045–0.065 115 – 130 0.045–0.065 P25-M20
51 42.5 – 51.5 0.04 – 0.06 115 – 130 0.04 – 0.06 P25-M20
1 39.5 – 45.6 0.04 – 0.06 100 – 120 0.045–0.065 P25-M20
Ø Bar ≤
2 39.5 – 45.6 0.045–0.065 95 – 120 0.065–0.085 P25-M20
25.4mm 3 36.5 – 42.5 0.065–0.085 S4–S9 90 – 110 0.09 – 0.11 P25-M20

CUT–OFF or 2 42.5 – 48.5 0.045–0.065 (S11) 110 – 130 0.065–0.085 P25-M20

3 44 – 45.5 0.065–0.085 100 – 130 0.09–0.11 P25-M20
PART–OFF
6 36.5 – 42.5 0.09 – 0.11 90 – 110 0.10–0.15 P25-M20
1 0.025 – 0.05 0.025 – 0.05
3 0.12 – 0.20 0.05 – 0.15 P20-P40
6 0.19 – 0.27 0.07 – 0.2 or K40
DRILLING 25–35 S4 100–220
12 0.25 – 0.32 0.10 – 0.25 TiN
15 0.28 – 0.35 0.13 – 0.27 coated
20 0.32 – 0.40 0.15 – 0.30

REMARKS ON TOOLING:
The use of coated tools (tips or insert) increases the tool life by 20% to 50% using the same cutting parameters,
or it increases the cutting conditions (speed) by 10% to 15% using the same tool wear. We recommended a
TiN coating (PVD or CVD).
110
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

7.3.1.2 Cutting conditions for CNC machinery:

Brazed Uncoated Coated
Carbide Carbide Insert Carbide Insert
Machining Depth of cut Cutting Speed Cutting Speed Cutting Speed Feed Type of
Operation or Width (mm) (m/min) (m/min) (m/min) (mm/rev) Tool
1 130 - 200 165 - 245 180 - 450 0.15 - 0.2 P10-M10

2 120 - 155 165 - 230 165 - 400 0.2 - 0.3 P20-M20

Ø Bar ≤ 25.4mm
3 100 - 135 130 - 195 165 - 355 0.3 - 0.4 P25-M25
TURNING
1 150 - 275 210 - 395 300 - 550 0.15 - 0.2 P10-M10
Ø Bar > 25.4mm
3 120 - 180 150 - 320 220 - 450 0.3 - 0.4 P20-M20

6 100 - 150 140 - 260 180 - 335 0.4 - 0.5 P25-M25

1 110 - 140 130 - 170 140 - 200 0.05 - 0.07 P20-M20

3 100 - 130 120 - 150 130 - 180 0.07 - 0.10 P20-M20

Ø Bar ≤ 25.4mm
6 90 - 120 110 - 140 130 -160 0.08 - 0.10 P25-M25
GROOVING
2 120 - 170 120 - 180 150 - 220 0.06 - 0.08 P20-M20
Ø Bar > 25.4mm
3 110 - 150 120 - 180 140 - 210 0.08 -0.10 P20-M20
6 100 - 140 110 - 160 130 - 170 0.09 - 0.11 P25-M25
1 95 - 115 105 - 145 135 - 185 0.05 - 0.07 P25-M25
Ø Bar ≤ 25.4mm 2 80 - 100 95 - 130 120 - 170 0.06 - 0.08 P25-M25
CUT-OFF or 3 75 - 85 85 - 110 105 - 145 0.07 - 0.09 P25-M25
PART OFF 2 105 - 125 120 - 160 150 - 200 0.07 - 0.09 P25-M25

3 95 - 115 105 - 140 135 - 190 0.08 - 0.10 P25-M25

Ø Bar > 25.4mm
6 85 - 95 90 - 120 120 - 160 0.09 - 0.15 P25-M25

HSS Drill type N Plain Carbide Drill

Machining Diameter Cutting speed Feed Type of Cutting Speed Feed Type of
Operation (mm) (m/min) (mm/rev) tool (m/min) (mm/rev) tool
1 0.025 - 0.05 0.025 - 0.05

3 0.12 - 0.20 0.05 - 0.15

P20-P40 or
6 0.19 - 0.27 0.07 - 0.2
DRILLING 25-35 S4 100-220 K40
12 0.25 - 0.32 0.10 – 0.25
TiN coated
15 0.28 - 0.35 0.13 – 0.27

20 0.32 - 0.40 0.15 – 0.30

DRILLING:
1. The quality of the cutting lubricant is important. There must be a large quantity (pressure+steady flow) coming
through regularly. On the large drills, it is recommended to use drills with oil holes (internal lubrication).
2. The cutting conditions recommended are valid for a depth of drilling equal to 4 x f maximum.
3. We would advise you use drills with a pointed angle of approximately 118°.

LUBRICANT:
We recommend lubricant with extreme pressure additives.

REMARKS ON THE TOOLING:

For the type of coating of the coated carbide tips (inserts), we recommend those with a final visible layer of
TiN, generally gold colour.

111
 ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

7.3.2 UGIMA® 303XL

C = 0.07 % max Cr = 17.0 - 18.0 % Ni = 8.2 – 9.5 % Mn = 1.5 – 2.0 % S = 0.35 – 0.40%

Conforms to standards: ASTM A276 Grade 303 - AISI 303

7.3.2.1 Cutting parameters for classical machines, multi-spindle, single-spindle screw machine:

* Second choice possible HSS Tools Carbide Tool

Machining Depth of cut Cutting speed Feed Type Cutting speed Feed Type of
Operation or width (mm) (m/min) (mm/rev) of tool (m/min) (mm/rev) tool
1 40 – 60 0.13 – 0.30 140 – 160 0.13 – 0.30 P10-M10
Ø Bar ≤ 25.4mm 2 35 – 50 0.15 – 0.35 115 – 220 0.15 – 0.37 P20-M20
3 28 – 48 0.17 – 0.40 S4–S5 100 – 190 0.17 – 0.45 P25-M20
TURNING
1 48– 62 0.13 – 0.30 (S9) 150 – 340 0.13 – 0.30 P10-M10
Ø Bar > 25.4mm 2 37– 57 0.15 – 0.35 120 – 290 0.15 – 0.37 P20-M20
3 34 – 52 0.17 – 0.40 100 – 260 0.17 – 0.45 P25-M20

2 38 – 60 0.07 – 0.12 100 – 170 0.07 – 0.12 P20-M20

6 36 – 56 0.07 – 0.12 100 – 160 0.07 – 0.12 P20-M20
12.7 34 – 54 0.06 – 0.11 90 – 155 0.06 – 0.11 P25-M20
Ø Bar ≤ 25.4mm
25 28 – 52 0.05 – 0.10 80 – 150 0.05 – 0.09 P25-M20
FORMING 51 26 – 52 0.04 – 0.09 S4–S5 70 – 145 0.04 – 0.085 P25-M20

–GROOVING 2 41 – 63 0.07 – 0.12 (S9) 110 – 195 0.07 – 0.12 P20-M20

6 39 – 59 0.07 – 0.12 100 – 175 0.07 – 0.12 P20-M20
Ø Bar > 25.4mm
12.7 37 – 57 0.06 – 0.11 95 – 165 0.06 – 0.11 P25-M20
25 31 – 55 0.05 – 0.10 90 – 155 0.05 – 0.09 P25-M20
51 29 – 55 0.04 – 0.09 75 – 150 0.04 – 0.085 P25-M20

2 38 – 60 0.04 – 0.070 100 – 170 0.04 – 0.070 P20-M20

6 36 – 56 0.04 – 0.075 100 – 160 0.04 – 0.075 P20-M20
12.7 34 – 54 0.045 – 0.075 90 – 155 0.045 – 0.075 P25-M20
Ø Bar ≤ 25.4mm
25 28 – 52 0.045 – 0.075 80 – 150 0.045 – 0.075 P25-M20
SHAVING– 51 26 – 52 0.04 – 0.08 S4–S5 70 – 145 0.04 – 0.08 P25-M20

SKIVING 2 41 – 63 0.04 – 0.070 (S9) 110 – 195 0.04 – 0.070 P20-M20

6 39 – 59 0.04 – 0.075 100 – 175 0.04 – 0.075 P20-M20
Ø Bar > 25.4mm
12.7 37 – 57 0.045 – 0.075 95 – 165 0.045 – 0.075 P25-M20
25 31 – 55 0.045 – 0.075 90 – 155 0.045 – 0.075 P25-M20
51 29 – 55 0.04 – 0.08 75 – 150 0.04 – 0.08 P25-M20

1 37 – 52 0.03 – 0.065 90 – 160 0.03 – 0.07 P25-M20

Ø Bar ≤ 25.4mm
2 35 – 50 0.04 – 0.08 75 – 150 0.04 – 0.09 P25-M20
CUT–OFF or 3 34 – 48 0.05 – 0.09 S4–S9 60 – 145 0.05 – 0.12 P25-M20

PART–OFF 2 40 – 55 0.04– 0.07 (S11) 90 – 170 0.04 – 0.09 P25-M20

3 38 – 53 0.05– 0.085 75 – 160 0.05 – 0.12 P25-M20
Ø Bar > 25.4mm
6 36 – 51 0.06 – 0.11 60 – 150 0.10 – 0.15 P25-M20

1 0.025 – 0.06 0.025 – 0.055

3 0.08 – 0.27 0.05 – 0.22 P20–P40
6 0.15 – 0.32 0.07 – 0.27 or K40
DRILLING 15-45 S4 50 – 250
12 0.20 – 0.37 0.10 – 0.32 TiN
15 0.25 – 0.42 0.13 – 0.37 coated
20 0.30 – 0.47 0.15 – 0.40

REMARKS ON TOOLING:
The use of coated tools (tips or insert) increases the tool life by 20% to 50% using the same cutting parameters,
or it increases the cutting conditions (speed) by 10% to 15% using the same tool wear. We recommended a
TiN coating (PVD or CVD).
112
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

7.3.2.2 Cutting conditions for CNC machinery:

Brazed Uncoated Coated
Carbide Carbide Insert Carbide Insert
Machining Depth of cut Cutting Speed Cutting Speed Cutting Speed Feed Type of
Operation or Width (mm) (m/min) (m/min) (m/min) (mm/rev) Tool
1 110 – 240 165 – 245 180 – 490 0.13 – 0.27 P10 – M10

2 100 – 200 165 – 230 165 – 440 0.15 – 0.37 P20 – M20
Ø Bar ≤ 25.4mm
3 80 – 170 130 – 195 155 – 390 0.17 – 0.47 P25 – M25
TURNING
1 130 – 320 180 – 440 260 – 590 0.13 – 0.27 P10 – M10
Ø Bar > 25.4mm
3 100 – 230 130 – 365 210 – 485 0.25 – 0.47 P20 – M20

6 80 – 185 120 – 295 160 – 370 0.27 – 0.57 P25 – M25

1 90 – 170 110 – 200 120 – 230 0.04 – 0.12 P20 – M20

3 75 – 160 95 – 180 105 – 210 0.06 – 0.11 P20 – M20

Ø Bar ≤ 25.4mm
6 60 – 150 80 –170 100 – 190 0.07 – 0.10 P25 – M25
GROOVING
2 100 – 200 100 – 210 130 – 255 0.07 – 0.12 P20 – M20
Ø Bar > 25.4mm
3 85 – 180 120 – 200 115 – 240 0.07 – 0.11 P20 – M20
6 70 – 175 110 – 190 110 – 200 0.07 – 0.11 P25 – M25
1 75 – 145 105 – 145 115 – 215 0.04 – 0.07 P25 – M25
Ø Bar ≤ 25.4mm 2 60 – 130 95 – 130 100 – 200 0.05 – 0.085 P25 – M25
CUT-OFF or 3 55 – 155 85 – 110 85 – 175 0.06 – 0.11 P25 – M25
PART OFF 2 85 – 155 100 – 190 130 – 230 0.04 – 0.07 P25 – M25

3 75 – 145 85 – 170 115 – 220 0.05 – 0.085 P25 – M25

Ø Bar > 25.4mm
6 65 – 125 70 – 150 100 – 190 0.06 – 0.11 P25 – M25

HSS Drill type N Plain Carbide Drill

Machining Diameter Cutting speed Feed Type of Cutting Speed Feed Type of
Operation (mm) (m/min) (mm/rev) tool (m/min) (mm/rev) tool
1 0.025 – 0.06 0.025 – 0.055
3 0.08 – 0.27 0.05 – 0.22
P20-P40
6 0.15 – 0.32 0.07 – 0.27
DRILLING 15 – 45 S4 50 – 250 or K40
12 0.20 – 0.37 0.10 – 0.32
TiN coated
15 0.25 – 0.42 0.13 – 0.37
20 0.30 – 0.47 0.15 – 0.40

DRILLING:
1. The quality of the cutting lubricant is important. There must be a large quantity (pressure+steady flow) coming
through regularly. On the large drills, it is recommended to use drills with oil holes (internal lubrication).
2. The cutting conditions recommended are valid for a depth of drilling equal to 4 x f maximum.
3. We would advise you use drills with a pointed angle of approximately 118°.

LUBRICANT:
We recommend lubricant with extreme pressure additives.

REMARKS ON THE TOOLING:

For the type of coating of the coated carbide tips (inserts), we recommend those with a final visible layer of
TiN, generally gold colour.

113
 ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

7.3.3 UGIMA® 304/304L

C = 0.03 % max Cr = 18.0 – 20.0 % Ni = 8 – 12 %

Conforms to standards: ASTM A276 Grade 304/304L, EN 10088-3 grade 1.4301/

1.4307 X5CrNi18-10/X2CrNi18-9, AISI 304/304L
7.3.3.1 Cutting parameters for classical machines, multi-spindle, single-spindle screw machine:
* Second choice possible HSS Tools Carbide Tool
Machining Depth of cut Cutting speed Feed Type Cutting speed Feed Type of
Operation or width (mm) (m/min) (mm/rev) of tool (m/min) (mm/rev) tool
1 30 – 38 0.13 – 0.2 100 – 155 0.13 – 0.2 P10 - M10
Ø Bar ≤ 25.4mm 2 27 – 35 0.15 – 0.25 90 – 130 0.15 – 0.25 P20 - M20
3 25 – 31 0.17 – 0.30 S4–S5 80 – 115 0.17 – 0.30 P25 - M20
TURNING
1 32 – 40 0.13 – 0.2 (S9)* 110 – 190 0.13 – 0.2 P10 - M10
Ø Bar > 25.4mm 2 29 – 38 0.15 – 0.25 100 – 160 0.15 – 0.25 P20 - M20
3 27 – 33 0.17 – 0.30 90 – 135 0.17 – 0.30 P25 - M20

2 31 – 38 0.07 – 0.08 80 – 100 0.07 – 0.08 P20 - M20

6 31 – 37 0.075 – 0.085 75 – 90 0.075 – 0.085 P20 - M20
12.7 29 – 36 0.07 – 0.08 75 – 90 0.07 – 0.08 P25 - M20
Ø Bar ≤ 25.4mm
25 29 – 36 0.06 – 0.07 70 – 85 0.06 – 0.07 P25 - M20
FORMING 51 29 – 36 0.05 – 0.06 S4–S5 65 – 80 0.05 – 0.06 P25 - M20

–GROOVING 2 35 – 41 0.075 – 0.085 (S9) 90 –110 0.075 – 0.085 P20 - M20

6 33 – 38 0.08 – 0.09 85 – 100 0.08 – 0.09 P20 - M20
Ø Bar > 25.4mm
12.7 32 – 38 0.075 – 0.085 80 – 95 0.075 – 0.085 P25 - M20
25 31 – 38 0.065 – 0.075 80 – 90 0.065 – 0.075 P25 - M20
51 31 – 38 0.055 – 0.065 75 – 85 0.055 – 0.065 P25 - M20

2 31 – 38 0.045 – 0.055 80 – 100 0.045 – 0.055 P20 - M20

6 31 – 37 0.05 – 0.06 75 – 90 0.05 – 0.06 P20 - M20
12.7 29 – 36 0.055 – 0.065 75 – 90 0.055 – 0.065 P25 - M20
Ø Bar ≤ 25.4mm
25 29 – 36 0.06 – 0.07 70 – 85 0.06 – 0.07 P25 - M20
SHAVING– 51 29 – 36 0.07 – 0.08 S4–S5 65 – 80 0.07 – 0.08 P25 - M20

SKIVING 2 35 – 41 0.045 – 0.055 (S9)* 90 –110 0.045 – 0.055 P20 - M20

6 33 – 38 0.05 – 0.06 85 – 100 0.05 – 0.06 P20 - M20
Ø Bar > 25.4mm
12.7 32 – 38 0.055 – 0.065 80 – 95 0.055 – 0.065 P25 - M20
25 31 – 38 0.06 – 0.07 80 – 90 0.06 – 0.07 P25 - M20
51 31 – 38 0.07 – 0.08 75 – 85 0.07 – 0.08 P25 - M20

1 31 – 35 0.05 – 0.06 75 – 95 0.05 – 0.06 P25 - M20

Ø Bar ≤ 25.4mm
2 29 – 34 0.07 – 0.075 70 – 85 0.07 – 0.075 P25 - M20
CUT–OFF or 3 22 – 26 0.075 – 0.08 S11 60 – 75 0.075 – 0.08 P25 - M20

PART–OFF 2 32 – 38 0.07 – 0.075 (S9)* 80 – 100 0.07 – 0.075 P25 - M20

3 29 – 33 0.075 – 0.085 70 – 90 0.075 – 0.085 P25 - M20
Ø Bar > 25.4mm
6 24 – 29 0.08 – 0.09 65 – 80 0.08 – 0.09 P25 - M20

1 0.02 – 0.04 0.02 – 0.04

3 0.06 – 0.10 0.05 – 0.09
P20–P40
6 0.09 – 0.14 0.07 – 0.12
DRILLING 17 – 25 S4 30 – 65 or K40
12 0.13 – 0.22 0.10 – 0.16
TiN coated
15 0.16 – 0.26 0.13 – 0.20
20 0.20 – 0.30 0.16 – 0.23

REMARKS ON TOOLING:
The use of coated tools (tips or insert) increases the tool life by 20% to 50% using the same cutting parameters,
or it increases the cutting conditions (speed) by 10% to 15% using the same tool wear. We recommended a
TiN coating (PVD or CVD).
114
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

7.3.3.2 Cutting conditions for CNC machinery:

Brazed Uncoated Coated
Carbide Carbide Insert Carbide Insert
Machining Depth of cut Cutting Speed Cutting Speed Cutting Speed Feed Type of
Operation or Width (mm) (m/min) (m/min) (m/min) (mm/rev) Tool
1 100 – 155 110 – 230 160 –280 0.15 – 0.2 P10 – M10

2 90 – 130 110 – 170 140 – 235 0.2 – 0.3 P20 – M20

Ø Bar ≤ 25.4mm
3 80 – 115 90 – 135 130 – 205 0.3 – 0.4 P25 – M25
TURNING
1 110 – 190 125 – 285 250 –330 0.15 – 0.2 P10 – M10
Ø Bar > 25.4mm
3 90 – 135 120 – 225 200 – 280 0.3 – 0.4 P20 – M20

6 90 – 135 120 – 195 160 – 220 0.4 – 0.5 P25 – M25

1 85 – 105 95 – 120 110 –140 0.05 – 0.06 P20 – M20

3 80 – 100 90 – 110 105 – 130 0.07 – 0.08 P20 – M20

Ø Bar ≤ 25.4mm
6 75 – 90 85 – 110 100 – 120 0.07 – 0.09 P25 – M25
GROOVING
2 90 –110 105 – 130 120 – 150 0.06 – 0.08 P20 – M20
Ø Bar > 25.4mm
3 85 – 105 100 – 125 110 – 140 0.07 –0.09 P20 – M20
6 85 – 100 100 – 115 110 – 130 0.08 – 0.10 P25 – M25
1 75 – 95 100 – 130 115 –140 0.05 – 0.06 P25 – M25
Ø Bar ≤ 25.4mm 2 70 – 85 90 – 120 105 – 130 0.07 – 0.075 P25 – M25
CUT-OFF or 3 60 – 75 80 – 110 100 – 120 0.075 – 0.08 P25 – M25
PART OFF 2 80 – 100 110 – 140 130 – 150 0.07 – 0.075 P25 – M25

3 70 – 90 100 – 130 115 – 140 0.075 – 0.085 P25 – M25

Ø Bar > 25.4mm
6 65 –80 85 – 120 100 – 130 0.08 – 0.09 P25 – M25

HSS Drill type N Plain Carbide Drill

Machining Diameter Cutting speed Feed Type of Cutting Speed Feed Type of
Operation (mm) (m/min) (mm/rev) tool (m/min) (mm/rev) tool
1 0.02 – 0.04 0.02 – 0.04
3 0.06 – 0.10 0.05 – 0.09
P20 – P40
6 0.09 – 0.14 0.07 – 0.12
DRILLING 17 – 25 S4 30 – 65 or K40
12 0.13 – 0.22 0.10 – 0.16
TiN coated
15 0.16 – 0.26 0.13 – 0.20
20 0.20 – 0.30 0.16 – 0.23

REMARKS ON THE GRADE:

As with all such grades as 304 and 304L (4301 and 4307), UGIMA® 304L is prone to strain hardening. It
is therefore recommended to use quite high feeds.

DRILLING:
1. The quality of the cutting lubricant is important. There must be a large quantity (pressure+steady flow) coming
through regularly. On the large drills, it is recommended to use drills with oil holes (internal lubrication).
2. The cutting conditions recommended are valid for a depth of drilling equal to 4 x f maximum.
3. We would advise you use drills with a pointed angle of approximately 118°.

LUBRICANT:
We recommend lubricant with extreme pressure additives.

REMARKS ON THE TOOLING:

For the type of coating of the coated carbide tips (inserts), we recommend those with a final visible layer of
TiN, generally gold colour. 115
 ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

7.3.4 ATLAS UGIMA® 316/316L

C = 0.03 % max Cr = 16.5 – 18.5 % Ni = 10 – 13 % Mo = 2.0 – 2.5 %

Conforms to standards: ASTM A276 Grade 316/316L, EN 10088-3 grade 1.4401/1.4404,

X5CrNiMo17-12-2/X2CrNiMo17-12-2, AISI grade 316/316L
7.3.4.1 Cutting parameters for classical machines, multi-spindle, single-spindle screw machine:
* Second choice possible HSS Tools Carbide Tool
Machining Depth of cut Cutting speed Feed Type Cutting speed Feed Type of
Operation or width (mm) (m/min) (mm/rev) of tool (m/min) (mm/rev) tool
1 28 – 36 0.13 – 0.2 90 – 140 0.13 – 0.2 P10 - M10
Ø Bar ≤ 25.4mm 2 25 – 33 0.15 – 0.25 80 – 125 0.15 – 0.25 P20 - M20
3 24 – 29 0.17 – 0.30 S4–S5 75 – 105 0.17 – 0.30 P25 - M20
TURNING
1 30 – 38 0.13 – 0.2 (S9)* 100 – 170 0.13 – 0.2 P10 - M10
Ø Bar > 25.4mm 2 27 – 36 0.15 – 0.25 90 – 120 0.15 – 0.25 P20 - M20
3 26 – 31 0.17 – 0.30 80 – 110 0.17 – 0.30 P25 - M20

2 31 – 36 0.07 – 0.08 75 – 90 0.07 – 0.08 P20 - M20

6 30 – 35 0.07 – 0.08 70 – 85 0.07 – 0.08 P20 - M20
12.7 29 – 34 0.065 – 0.075 70 – 85 0.065 – 0.075 P25 - M20
Ø Bar ≤ 25.4mm
25 29 – 34 0.055 – 0.065 65 – 80 0.055 – 0.065 P25 - M20
FORMING 51 29 – 34 0.045 – 0.055 S4–S5 60 – 70 0.045 – 0.055 P25 - M20

–GROOVING 2 33 – 38 0.075 – 0.085 (S9) 80 – 95 0.075 – 0.085 P20 - M20

6 32 – 36 0.075 – 0.085 75 – 90 0.075 – 0.085 P20 - M20
Ø Bar > 25.4mm
12.7 31 – 35 0.07 – 0.08 75 – 90 0.07 – 0.08 P25 - M20
25 31 – 35 0.06 – 0.07 70 – 85 0.06 – 0.07 P25 - M20
51 31 – 35 0.05 – 0.06 65 – 75 0.05 – 0.06 P25 - M20

2 31 – 36 0.04 75 – 90 0.04 P20 - M20

6 30 – 35 0.05 70 – 85 0.05 P20 - M20
12.7 29 – 34 0.055 70 – 85 0.055 P25 - M20
Ø Bar ≤ 25.4mm
25 29 – 34 0.055 65 – 80 0.055 P25 - M20
SHAVING– 51 29 – 34 0.075 S4–S5 60 – 70 0.075 P25 - M20

SKIVING 2 33 – 38 0.04 (S9)* 80 – 95 0.04 P20 - M20

6 32 – 36 0.05 75 – 90 0.05 P20 - M20
Ø Bar > 25.4mm
12.7 31 – 35 0.055 75 – 90 0.055 P25 - M20
25 31 – 35 0.055 70 – 85 0.055 P25 - M20
51 31 – 35 0.075 65 – 75 0.075 P25 - M20

1 29 – 32 0.05 – 0.06 65 – 85 0.05 – 0.06 P25 - M20

Ø Bar ≤ 25.4mm
2 26 – 30 0.07 – 0.075 60 – 75 0.07 – 0.075 P25 - M20
CUT–OFF or 3 20 – 24 0.075 – 0.08 S11 55 – 65 0.075 – 0.08 P25 - M20

PART–OFF 2 30 – 36 0.055 – 0.065 (S9)* 70 – 90 0.055 – 0.065 P25 - M20

3 26 – 30 0.075 – 0.085 65 – 80 0.075 – 0.085 P25 - M20
Ø Bar > 25.4mm
6 22 – 26 0.08 – 0.09 60 – 70 0.08 – 0.09 P25 - M20

1 0.02 – 0.04 0.02 – 0.04

3 0.06 – 0.10 0.05 – 0.09
P20 – P40
6 0.09 – 0.14 0.07 – 0.12
DRILLING 15 – 22 S4 30 – 60 or K40
12 0.13 – 0.22 0.10 – 0.16
TiN coated
15 0.16 – 0.26 0.13 – 0.20
20 0.20 - 0.30 0.16 – 0.23

REMARKS ON TOOLING:
The use of coated tools (tips or insert) increases the tool life by 20% to 50% using the same cutting parameters,
or it increases the cutting conditions (speed) by 10% to 15% using the same tool wear. We recommended a
TiN coating (PVD or CVD).
116
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

7.3.4.2 Cutting conditions for CNC machinery:

Brazed Uncoated Coated
Carbide Carbide Insert Carbide Insert
Machining Depth of cut Cutting Speed Cutting Speed Cutting Speed Feed Type of
Operation or Width (mm) (m/min) (m/min) (m/min) (mm/rev) Tool
1 90 – 150 105 – 220 140 – 260 0.15 – 0.2 P10 – M10

2 80 – 125 100 – 160 130 – 210 0.2 – 0.3 P20 – M20

Ø Bar ≤ 25.4mm
3 75 – 105 90 – 150 120 – 180 0.3 – 0.4 P25 – M25
TURNING
1 100 – 170 115 –230 230 – 310 0.15 – 0.2 P10 – M10
Ø Bar > 25.4mm
3 80 – 110 105 – 170 185 – 230 0.3 – 0.4 P20 – M20

6 75 – 110 105 – 150 155 – 200 0.4 – 0.5 P25 – M25

1 80 – 95 85 – 120 105 –130 0.05 – 0.06 P20 – M20

3 75 – 90 80 – 110 95 – 120 0.07 – 0.08 P20 – M20

Ø Bar ≤ 25.4mm
6 70 – 85 75 – 100 90 – 110 0.07 – 0.09 P25 – M25
GROOVING
2 85 – 100 100 – 130 120 – 140 0.06 – 0.08 P20 – M20
Ø Bar > 25.4mm
3 80 – 95 90 – 120 105 – 130 0.07 – 0.09 P20 – M20
6 75 – 90 85 – 110 100 – 120 0.08 – 0.10 P25 – M25
1 65 – 85 75 – 120 105 – 130 0.05 – 0.06 P25 – M25
Ø Bar ≤ 25.4mm 2 60 – 75 75 – 110 95 – 120 0.07 – 0.075 P25 – M25
CUT-OFF or 3 55 – 65 70 – 105 90 – 110 0.075 – 0.08 P25 – M25
PART OFF 2 70 – 90 105 – 125 120 – 140 0.055 – 0.065 P25 – M25

3 65 – 80 90 – 120 105 – 130 0.075 – 0.085 P25 – M25

Ø Bar > 25.4mm
6 60 – 70 75 – 110 90 – 120 0.08 – 0.09 P25 – M25

HSS Drill type N Plain Carbide Drill

Machining Diameter Cutting speed Feed Type of Cutting Speed Feed Type of
Operation (mm) (m/min) (mm/rev) tool (m/min) (mm/rev) tool
1 0.02 – 0.04 0.02 – 0.04
3 0.06 – 0.10 0.05 – 0.09
P20 – P40
6 15 – 22 0.09 – 0.14 0.07 – 0.12
DRILLING S4 30 – 60 or K40
12 0.13 – 0.22 0.10 – 0.16
TiN coated
15 0.16 – 0.26 0.13 – 0.20
20 0.20 – 0.30 0.16 – 0.23

REMARKS ON THE GRADE:

As with all such grades as 304 and 304L (4301 and 4307), UGIMA® 304L is prone to strain hardening. It
is therefore recommended to use quite high feeds.

DRILLING:
1. The quality of the cutting lubricant is important. There must be a large quantity (pressure+steady flow) coming
through regularly. On the large drills, it is recommended to use drills with oil holes (internal lubrication).
2. The cutting conditions recommended are valid for a depth of drilling equal to 4 x f maximum.
3. We would advise you use drills with a pointed angle of approximately 118°.

LUBRICANT:
We recommend lubricant with extreme pressure additives.

REMARKS ON THE TOOLING:

For the type of coating of the coated carbide tips (inserts), we recommend those with a final visible layer of
TiN, generally gold colour. 117
 ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

7.3.5 ATLAS UGIMA® 329

UGIMA® 4460 OR 4460X2 UGIMA® 4460 = UGIMA®329 – UGIMA®4460X2 = UGIMA®329X2
C = 0.05 % max Cr = 25.0 – 28.0 % Ni = 4.5 – 6.5 % Mo = 1.3 – 2.0 % N = 0.05 – 0.2 %

Conforms to standards: EN 10088-3 : 1.4460 X3CrNiMoN27-5-2 - AISI 329

7.3.5.1 Cutting parameters for classical machines, multi-spindle, single-spindle screw machine:
* Second choice possible TiAlN Coated Carbide tool
Depth of cut or Cutting speed Feed Type of
Machining Operation
width (mm) (m/min) (mm/rev) tool

1 70 – 120 0.15 – 0.25 P10 – M10

2 60 – 100 0.20 – 0.35 P20 – M20

Ø Bar ≤ 25.4mm
3 50 – 80 0.20 – 0.40 P25 – M20
TURNING
1 80 – 140 0.15 – 0.25 P10 – M10
Ø Bar > 25.4mm
2 70 – 120 0.20 – 0.35 P20 – M20

3 60 – 100 0.20 – 0.40 P25 – M20

2 50 – 100 0.07 – 0.08 P20 – M20

Ø Bar ≤ 25.4mm 6 40 – 80 0.07 – 0.08 P20 – M20

FORMING – 12.7 35 – 65 0.065 – 0.075 P25 – M20

GROOVING 2 60 – 110 0.075 – 0.085 P20 – M20
Ø Bar > 25.4mm 6 50 – 90 0.075 – 0.085 P20 – M20

12.7 45 – 75 0.07 – 0.08 P25 – M20

1 60 – 110 0.04 – 0.06 P25 – M20

Ø Bar ≤ 25.4mm 2 50 – 100 0.05 – 0.07 P25 – M20

CUT–OFF or 3 40 – 80 0.06 – 0.08 P25 – M20

PART–OFF 2 60 – 110 0.055 – 0.065 P25 – M20

Ø Bar > 25.4mm 3 50 – 90 0.06 – 0.085 P25 – M20

6 35 – 60 0.07 – 0.09 P25 – M20

HSS Drill type N Plain Carbide Drill

Machining Diameter Cutting Speed Feed (mm/ Type of Cutting Speed Feed (mm/ Type of
operation (mm) (m/min) rev) tool (m/min) rev) tool
1 0.02 – 0.08 0.02 – 0.04
3 0.08 – 0.20 0.05 – 0.09
P20 – P40
6 0.15 – 0.25 0.075 – 0.15
DRILLING 5 – 20 S4 40 – 120 or K40
12 0.17 – 0.28 0.10 – 0.16
TiN coated
15 0.20 – 0.30 0.13 – 0.20
20 0.25 – 0.35 0.16 – 0.23

REMARKS ON THE GRADE:

The difference between UGIMA®4460 and UGIMA®4460X2 is the sulphur content. UGIMA®4460 is
a grade for bars manufactured by drawing with a sulphur content which falls within 0.010 and 0.020%.
UGIMA®4460X2 has a sulphur content between 0.020% and 0.030% in order to improve the machinability
of the grade by strengthening the synergy of effects of sulphur and UGIMA® process.
REMARKS ON TOOLING:
The use of coated tools (tips or insert) increases the tool life by 20% to 50% using the same cutting parameters,
or it increases the cutting conditions (speed) by 10% to 15% using the same tool wear. We recommended a
118 TiN coating (PVD or CVD).
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

7.3.5.2 Cutting conditions for CNC machinery:

TiN or TiAIN Coated Coated Carbide
Carbide Tool Insert (Tip)
Machining Depth of cut Cutting Speed Cutting Speed Feed
Type of Tool
Operation or Width (mm) (m/min) (m/min) (mm/rev)
1 70 – 120 110 – 160 0.15 – 0.25 P10 – M10

2 60 – 100 100 – 145 0.20 – 0.35 P20 – M20

Ø Bar ≤ 25.4mm
3 50 – 80 90 – 120 0.20 – 0.40 P25 – M25
TURNING
1 80 – 140 160 – 240 0.15 – 0.25 P10 – M10
Ø Bar > 25.4mm
3 60 – 100 120 – 200 0.3 – 0.4 P20 – M20

6 50 – 90 100 – 160 0.4 – 0.5 P25 – M25

1 60 – 105 75 – 120 0.05 – 0.06 P20 – M20

3 50 – 90 60 – 110 0.07 – 0.08 P20 – M20

Ø Bar ≤ 25.4mm
6 40 – 80 50 – 100 0.07 – 0.09 P25 – M25
GROOVING
2 65 – 110 100 – 120 0.06 – 0.08 P20 – M20
Ø Bar > 25.4mm
3 60 – 100 95 – 110 0.07 – 0.09 P20 – M20
6 50 – 90 80 – 100 0.08 – 0.10 P25 – M25
1 60 – 110 60 – 110 0.04 – 0.06 P25 – M25
Ø Bar ≤ 25.4mm 2 50 – 100 50 – 100 0.05 – 0.07 P25 – M25
CUT-OFF or 3 40 – 80 40 – 80 0.06 – 0.08 P25 – M25
PART OFF 2 60 – 110 60 – 110 0.055 – 0.065 P25 – M25

3 50 – 90 50 – 90 0.06 – 0.085 P25 – M25

Ø Bar > 25.4mm
6 35 – 60 35 – 60 0.07 – 0.09 P25 – M25

HSS Drill type N Plain Carbide Drill

Machining Diameter Cutting speed Feed Type of Cutting Speed Feed Type of
Operation (mm) (m/min) (mm/rev) tool (m/min) (mm/rev) tool
1 0.02 – 0.08 0.02 – 0.04
3 0.08 – 0.20 0.05 – 0.09
P20 – P40
6 5 – 20 0.15 – 0.25 0.075 – 0.15
DRILLING S4 40 – 120 or K40
12 0.17 – 0.28 0.10 – 0.16
TiN coated
15 0.20 – 0.30 0.13 – 0.20
20 0.25 – 0.35 0.16 – 0.23

DRILLING:
1. The quality of the cutting lubricant is important. There must be a large quantity (pressure+steady flow) coming
through regularly. On the large drills, it is recommended to use drills with oil holes (internal lubrication).
2. The cutting conditions recommended are valid for a depth of drilling equal to 4 x f maximum.
3. We would advise you use drills with a pointed angle of approximately 118°.

LUBRICANT:
We recommend lubricant with extreme pressure additives.

REMARKS ON THE TOOLING:

For the type of coating of the coated carbide tips (inserts), we recommend those with a final visible layer of
TiN, generally gold colour.

119
 ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

7.3.6 ATLAS UGIMA® 420

UGIMA® 420A = UGIMA® 4021
C = 0.16 – 0.25 % Cr = 12 .0 – 14.0 % S = 0.015 – 0.030 %
Conforms to standards: ASTM A276 Grade 420 - EN 10088-3 : 1.4021 X20Cr13 - AISI 420
7.3.6.1 Cutting parameters for classical machines, multi-spindle, single-spindle screw machine:
* Second choice possible HSS Tools Carbide Tool
Machining Depth of cut Metallurgical Cutting speed Feed Type Cutting speed Feed Type of
Operation or width (mm) Conditions (m/min) (mm/rev) of tool (m/min) (mm/rev) tool
1 Annealed–cold drawn 32 – 40 0.08–0.2 85 – 165 0.08–0.2 P10–M10
1 Treated1–cold drawn 30 – 38 0.08–0.2 100 – 180 0.08–0.2 P10–M10
2 Annealed–cold drawn 30 – 38 0.09–0.25 75 – 155 0.09–0.25 P20–M20
2 Treated–cold drawn 27 – 35 0.09–0.25 90 – 170 0.09–0.25 P20–M20
Ø Bar ≤
3 Annealed–cold drawn 27 – 35 0.10–0.30 65 – 135 0.10–0.30 P25–M30
25.4mm 3 Treated–cold drawn 24 – 32 0.10–0.30 S4–S5 80 – 150 0.10–0.30 P25–M30
TURNING 1 Annealed 40 – 55 0.08–0.2 (S9)* 100 – 180 0.08–0.2 P10–M10
1 Treated 35 – 50 0.08–0.2 140 – 200 0.08–0.2 P10–M10
Ø Bar > 25.4mm
3 Annealed 35 – 50 0.09–0.25 90 – 140 0.09–0.25 P20–M20
3 Treated 30 – 45 0.09–0.25 130 – 190 0.09–0.25 P20–M20
6 Annealed 30 – 45 0.30–0.50 80 – 120 0.30–0.50 P25–M30
6 Treated 25 – 40 0.30–0.50 110 – 150 0.30–0.50 P25–M30
2 Annealed–cold drawn 32 – 40 0.05–0.08 85 – 165 0.05–0.08 P20–M20
2 Treated–cold drawn 30 – 38 0.05–0.08 100 – 180 0.05–0.08 P20–M20
6 Annealed–cold drawn 30 – 38 0.08–0.12 75 – 155 0.08–0.12 P25–M30
Ø Bar ≤ 6 Treated–cold drawn 27 – 35 0.08–0.12 90 – 170 0.08–0.12 P25–M30
25.4mm 13 Annealed–cold drawn 27 – 35 0.06–0.10 65 – 135 0.06–0.10 P25–M30
13 Treated–cold drawn 24 – 32 0.06–0.10 S4–S5 80 – 150 0.06–0.10 P25–M30
FORMING –
2 Annealed 40 – 55 0.06–0.10 (S9) 100 – 180 0.06–0.10 P20–M20
GROOVING 2 Treated 35 – 50 0.06–0.10 140 – 200 0.06–0.10 P20–M20
Ø Bar > 25.4mm 6 Annealed 35 – 50 0.09–0.12 90 – 140 0.09–0.12 P25–M30
6 Treated 30 – 45 0.09–0.12 100 – 180 0.09–0.12 P25–M30
13 Annealed 30 – 45 0.07–0.11 80 – 120 0.07–0.11 P25–M30
13 Treated 25 – 40 0.07–0.11 90 – 160 0.07–0.11 P25–M30
1 Annealed–cold drawn 29 – 36 0.01–0.03 55 – 85 0.01–0.03 P25–M20
1 Treated–cold drawn 27 – 35 0.01–0.03 60 – 90 0.02–0.03 P25–M20
2 Annealed–cold drawn 27 – 35 0.02–0.05 60 – 90 0.03–0.05 P25–M20
Ø Bar ≤ 2 Treated–cold drawn 25 – 32 0.02–0.05 65 – 95 0.03–0.05 P25–M20
25.4mm 3 Annealed–cold drawn 25 – 32 0.03–0.06 65 – 95 0.03–0.06 P25–M20
3 Treated–cold drawn 23 – 29 0.03–0.06 S4–S9 70 – 105 0.03–0.06 P25–M20
CUT OFF or
2 Annealed 35 – 50 0.02–0.05 (S11) 65 – 95 0.02–0.06 P25–M20
PART OFF 2 Treated 32 – 45 0.02–0.05 70 – 100 0.02–0.06 P25–M20
Ø Bar > 25.4mm 3 Annealed 32 – 45 0.03–0.06 75 – 100 0.03–0.08 P25–M30
3 Treated 25 – 40 0.03–0.06 80 – 110 0.03–0.08 P25–M20
6 Annealed 25 – 40 0.04–0.07 80 – 110 0.04–0.12 P25–M20
6 Treated 23 – 35 0.04–0.07 85 – 120 0.04–0.12 P25–M30
1 0.025–0.05 0.025–0.05
3 0.12–0.20 0.05–0.12 P20 - P40
6 0.19–0.27 S4 TiN 80 – 180 0.05–0.15 or K40
DRILLING 10 – 40
12 0.25–0.32 coated 0.10–0.25 TiN
15 0.28–0.35 0.13–0.27 coated
20 0.32–0.40 0.15–0.30
1
Hardened and tempered to tensile strength of 700 MPa ≤ Rm ≤ 950 MPa

REMARKS ON TOOLING:
The use of coated tools (tips or insert) increases the tool life by 20% to 50% using the same cutting parameters,
or it increases the cutting conditions (speed) by 10% to 15% using the same tool wear. We recommended a
120 TiN coating (PVD or CVD).
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

7.3.6.2 Cutting conditions for CNC machinery:

Brazed Uncoated Coated
Carbide Carbide Insert Carbide Insert
Machining Depth of cut or Metallurgic Cutting Speed Cutting Speed Cutting Speed Feed Type of
Operation width (mm) conditions (m/min) (m/min) (m/min) (mm/rev) Tool
1 Annealed -cold drawn 85 – 165 150 – 210 200 – 280 0.08–0.2 P10-M10
1 Treated2 -cold drawn 100 – 180 170 – 240 220 – 330 0.08–0.2 P10-M10
2 Annealed -cold drawn 75 – 155 140 – 200 180 – 250 0.09–0.25 P20-M20
Ø Bar ≤ 2 Treated -cold drawn 90 – 170 150 – 220 200 – 300 0.09–0.25 P20-M20
3 Annealed -cold drawn 65 – 135 120 – 180 160 – 220 0.10–0.30 P25-M30
25.4mm 3 Treated -cold drawn 80 – 150 140 – 200 180 – 280 0.10–0.30 P25-M30
TURNING 1 Annealed 100 – 180 170 – 240 220 – 300 0.08–0.2 P10-M10
1 Treated 140 – 200 220 – 270 270 – 350 0.08–0.2 P10-M10
Ø Bar > 25.4mm 3 Annealed 90 – 140 130 – 200 180 – 250 0.09–0.25 P20-M20
3 Treated 130 – 190 160 – 220 230 – 325 0.09–0.25 P20-M20
6 Annealed 80 – 120 100 – 170 150 – 220 0.30–0.50 P25-M30
6 Treated 110 – 150 130 – 190 200 – 270 0.30–0.50 P25-M30
2 Annealed -cold drawn 85 – 165 140 – 180 170 – 210 0.07–0.15 P20-M20
Ø Bar ≤ 2 Treated -cold drawn 100 – 180 160 – 220 200 – 250 0.07–0.15 P20-M20
6 Annealed -cold drawn 75 – 155 110 – 160 140 – 190 0.10–0.25 P25-M30
25.4mm 6 Treated -cold drawn 90 – 170 150 – 210 160 – 220 0.10–0.25 P25-M30

GROOVING 2 Annealed 100 – 180 160 – 200 190 – 240 0.08–0.17 P20-M20
2 Treated 140 – 200 180 – 220 220 – 270 0.06–0.17 P20-M20
Ø Bar > 25.4mm 6 Annealed 90 – 140 110 – 160 150 – 210 0.12–0.25 P25-M30
6 Treated 100 – 180 150 – 210 180 – 250 0.12–0.25 P25-M30
1 Annealed -cold drawn 55 – 85 80 – 120 100 – 160 0.01–0.03 P25-M20
1 Treated -cold drawn 60 – 90 90 – 150 120 – 180 0.01–0.03 P25-M20
2 Annealed -cold drawn 60 – 90 90 – 130 110 – 170 0.03–0.06 P25-M20
Ø Bar ≤
2 Treated -cold drawn 65 – 95 100 – 160 130 – 220 0.03–0.06 P25-M20
25.4mm 3 Annealed -cold drawn 65 – 95 100 – 140 120 – 180 0.03–0.08 P25-M20
3 Treated -cold drawn 70 – 105 120 – 180 140 – 260 0.03–0.08 P25-M20
CUT-OFF or
2 Annealed 65 – 95 100 – 140 120 – 180 0.02–0.06 P25-M20
PART OFF 2 Treated 70 – 100 110 – 180 140 – 240 0.02–0.06 P25-M20
3 Annealed 75 – 100 110 – 160 130 – 200 0.04–0.10 P25-M30
Ø Bar > 25.4mm 3 Treated 80 – 110 130 – 200 160 – 280 0.04–0.10 P25-M20
6 Annealed 80 – 110 120 – 180 140 – 210 0.04–0.12 P25-M20
6 Treated 85 – 120 140 – 220 170 – 300 0.04–0.12 P25-M30
2
Hardened and tempered to tensile strength of 700 MPa ≤ Rm ≤ 950 MPa
HSS Drill type N Plain Carbide Drill
Machining Diameter Cutting speed Feed Type of Cutting Speed Feed Type of
Operation (mm) (m/min) (mm/rev) tool (m/min) (mm/rev) tool
1 0.025 – 0.05 0.025 – 0.05
3 0.12 – 0.20 0.05 – 0.12
P20 – P40
6 0.19 – 0.27 S4 TiN 0.05 – 0.15
DRILLING 10 – 40 80 – 180 or K40
12 0.25 – 0.32 Coated 0.10 – 0.25
TiN coated
15 0.28 – 0.35 0.13 – 0.27
20 0.32 – 0.40 0.15 – 0.30
DRILLING:
1. The quality of the cutting lubricant is important. There must be a large quantity (pressure+steady flow) coming
through regularly. On the large drills, it is recommended to use drills with oil holes (internal lubrication).
2. The cutting conditions recommended are valid for a depth of drilling equal to 4 x f maximum.
3. We would advise you use drills with a pointed angle of approximately 118°.
LUBRICANT:
We recommend lubricant with extreme pressure additives.
REMARKS ON THE TOOLING:
For the type of coating of the coated carbide tips (inserts), we recommend those with a final visible layer of
TiN, generally gold colour. 121
 ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

7.3.7 ATLAS UGIMA® 420B

UGIMA® 420B = UGIMA® 4028
C = 0.26 – 0.35 % Cr = 12 .0 – 14.0 % S = 0.015 – 0.030 %
Conforms to standards: ASTM A276 Grade 420 - EN 10088-3 : 1.4028 X20Cr13 - AISI 420
7.3.7.1 Cutting parameters for classical machines, multi-spindle, single-spindle screw machine:
* Second choice possible HSS Tools Carbide Tool
Machining Depth of cut Metallurgical Cutting speed Feed Type Cutting speed Feed Type of
Operation or width (mm) Conditions (m/min) (mm/rev) of tool (m/min) (mm/rev) tool
1 Annealed–cold drawn 25 – 31 0.08 – 0.2 65 – 140 0.08 – 0.2 P10–M10
1 Treated3–cold drawn 23 – 29 0.08 – 0.2 80 – 160 0.08 – 0.2 P10–M10
2 Annealed–cold drawn 23 – 29 0.09 – 0.25 60 – 125 0.09 – 0.25 P20–M20
2 Treated–cold drawn 21 – 26.5 0.09 – 0.25 70 – 150 0.09 – 0.25 P20–M20
Ø Bar ≤
3 Annealed–cold drawn 21 – 26.5 0.10 – 0.30 55 – 115 0.10 – 0.30 P25–M30
25.4mm 3 Treated–cold drawn 18.5 – 24 0.10 – 0.30 S4–S5 65 – 140 0.10 – 0.30 P25–M30
TURNING 1 Annealed 35 – 42 0.08 – 0.2 (S9)* 75 – 155 0.08 – 0.2 P10–M10
1 Treated 32 – 38.5 0.08 – 0.2 90 – 175 0.08 – 0.2 P10–M10
Ø Bar > 25.4mm
3 Annealed 28.5 – 35 0.09 – 0.25 65 – 135 0.09 – 0.25 P20–M20
3 Treated 25 – 32 0.09 – 0.25 75 – 155 0.09 – 0.25 P20–M20
6 Annealed 23 – 30 0.30 – 0.50 50 – 100 0.30 – 0.50 P25–M30
6 Treated 21 – 27.5 0.30 – 0.50 65 – 120 0.30 – 0.50 P25–M30
2 Annealed–cold drawn 25 – 31 0.05 – 0.08 55 – 125 0.05 – 0.08 P20–M20
2 Treated–cold drawn 23 – 29 0.05 – 0.08 80 – 145 0.05 – 0.08 P20–M20
6 Annealed–cold drawn 23 – 29 0.08 – 0.12 60 – 115 0.08 – 0.12 P25–M30
Ø Bar ≤ 6 Treated–cold drawn 21 – 26.5 0.08 – 0.12 70 – 135 0.08 – 0.12 P25–M30
25.4mm 13 Annealed–cold drawn 21 – 26.5 0.06 – 0.10 50 – 105 0.06 – 0.10 P25–M30
13 Treated–cold drawn 18.5 – 24 0.06 – 0.10 S4–S5 60 – 120 0.06 – 0.10 P25–M30
FORMING –
2 Annealed 35 – 42 0.06 – 0.10 (S9) 80 – 135 0.06 – 0.10 P20–M20
GROOVING 2 Treated 32 – 38.5 0.06 – 0.10 100 – 165 0.06 – 0.10 P20–M20
Ø Bar > 25.4mm 6 Annealed 28.5 – 35 0.09 – 0.12 65 – 125 0.09 – 0.12 P25–M30
6 Treated 25 – 32 0.09 – 0.12 80 – 145 0.09 – 0.12 P25–M30
13 Annealed 23 – 30 0.07 – 0.11 60 – 115 0.07 – 0.11 P25–M30
13 Treated 21 – 27.5 0.07 – 0.11 65 – 135 0.07 – 0.11 P25–M30
1 Annealed–cold drawn 25 – 31 0.05 – 0.03 45 – 75 0.01 – 0.03 P25–M20
1 Treated–cold drawn 23 – 29 0.04 – 0.03 50 – 80 0.06 – 0.03 P25–M20
2 Annealed–cold drawn 23 – 29 0.05 – 0.05 50 – 80 0.07 – 0.05 P25–M20
Ø Bar ≤ 2 Treated–cold drawn 21 – 26.5 0.02 – 0.05 55 – 85 0.03 – 0.05 P25–M20
25.4mm 3 Annealed–cold drawn 21 – 26.5 0.06 – 0.06 55 – 85 0.03 – 0.06 P25–M20
3 Treated–cold drawn 18.5 – 24 0.03 – 0.06 S4–S9 60 – 90 0.03 – 0.06 P25–M20
CUT OFF or
2 Annealed 33 – 42 0.02 – 0.05 (S11) 55 – 80 0.02 – 0.06 P25–M20
PART OFF 2 Treated 27 – 38.5 0.02 – 0.05 60 – 80 0.02 – 0.06 P25–M20
Ø Bar > 25.4mm 3 Annealed 28.5 – 35 0.03 – 0.06 60 – 85 0.03 – 0.08 P25–M30
3 Treated 25 – 32 0.03 – 0.06 75 – 95 0.03 – 0.08 P25–M20
6 Annealed 23 – 30 0.08 – 0.07 75 – 95 0.04 – 0.12 P25–M20
6 Treated 21 – 27.5 0.04 – 0.07 80 – 105 0.04 – 0.12 P25–M30
1 0.025–0.05
3 0.07 – 0.12
6 0.1 – 0.15 S4 TiN
DRILLING 12 – 35
12 0.15 – 0.20 coated
15 0.15 – 0.25
20 0.20 – 0.30
3
Hardened and tempered to tensile strength of 800 MPa ≤ Rm ≤ 1000 MPa

REMARKS ON TOOLING:
The use of coated tools (tips or insert) increases the tool life by 20% to 50% using the same cutting parameters,
or it increases the cutting conditions (speed) by 10% to 15% using the same tool wear. We recommended a
122 TiN coating (PVD or CVD).
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

7.3.7.2 Cutting conditions for CNC machinery:

Brazed Uncoated Coated
Carbide Carbide Insert Carbide Insert
Machining Depth of cut or Metallurgic Cutting Speed Cutting Speed Cutting Speed Feed Type of
Operation width (mm) conditions (m/min) (m/min) (m/min) (mm/rev) Tool
1 Annealed -cold drawn 65 – 140 120 – 195 140 – 195 0.08 - 0.2 P10-M10
1 Treated4 -cold drawn 80 – 160 145 – 205 155 – 230 0.08 - 0.2 P10-M10
2 Annealed -cold drawn 60 – 125 115 – 170 125 – 175 0.09–0.25 P20-M20
Ø Bar ≤ 2 Treated -cold drawn 70 – 150 125 – 185 140 – 210 0.09–0.25 P20-M20
3 Annealed -cold drawn 55 – 115 100 – 150 115 – 155 0.10–0.30 P25-M30
25.4mm 3 Treated -cold drawn 65 – 140 120 – 170 130 – 200 0.10–0.30 P25-M30
TURNING 1 Annealed 75 – 155 145 – 230 185 – 260 0.08 - 0.2 P10-M10
1 Treated 90 – 175 185 – 240 230 – 325 0.08 - 0.2 P10-M10
Ø Bar > 25.4mm 3 Annealed 65 – 135 110 – 190 150 – 235 0.09–0.25 P20-M20
3 Treated 75 – 155 130 – 205 190 – 270 0.09–0.25 P20-M20
6 Annealed 50 – 100 85 – 145 125 – 185 0.30–0.50 P25-M30
6 Treated 65 – 120 110 – 160 170 – 230 0.30–0.50 P25-M30
2 Annealed -cold drawn 55 – 125 120 – 150 145 – 180 0.07–0.15 P20-M20
Ø Bar ≤ 2 Treated -cold drawn 80 – 145 130 – 185 170 – 210 0.07–0.15 P20-M20
6 Annealed -cold drawn 60 – 115 90 – 140 115 – 165 0.10–0.25 P25-M30
25.4mm 6 Treated -cold drawn 70 – 135 125 – 180 130 – 185 0.10–0.25 P25-M30

GROOVING 2 Annealed 80 – 135 130 – 170 155 – 205 0.08–0.17 P20-M20

2 Treated 100 – 165 150 – 185 180 – 230 0.06–0.17 P20-M20
Ø Bar > 25.4mm 6 Annealed 65 – 125 95 – 140 125 – 180 0.12–0.25 P25-M30
6 Treated 80 – 145 125 – 180 150 – 210 0.12–0.25 P25-M30
1 Annealed -cold drawn 45 – 75 65 – 105 70 – 115 0.01–0.03 P25-M20
1 Treated -cold drawn 50 – 80 75 – 125 85 – 125 0.01–0.03 P25-M20
2 Annealed -cold drawn 50 – 80 75 – 120 75 – 120 0.03–0.06 P25-M20
Ø Bar ≤
2 Treated -cold drawn 55 – 85 85 – 140 90 – 155 0.03–0.06 P25-M20
25.4mm 3 Annealed -cold drawn 55 – 85 85 – 120 85 – 125 0.03–0.08 P25-M20
3 Treated -cold drawn 60 – 90 105 – 150 95 – 180 0.03–0.08 P25-M20
CUT-OFF or
2 Annealed 55 – 80 85 – 120 95 – 150 0.02–0.06 P25-M20
PART OFF 2 Treated 60 – 80 90 – 150 115 – 200 0.02–0.06 P25-M20
3 Annealed 60 – 85 90 – 140 110 – 170 0.04–0.10 P25-M30
Ø Bar > 25.4mm 3 Treated 75 – 95 110 – 170 135 – 235 0.04–0.10 P25-M20
6 Annealed 75 – 95 95 – 150 115 – 175 0.04–0.12 P25-M20
6 Treated 80 – 105 115 – 185 145 – 250 0.04–0.12 P25-M30
4
Hardened and tempered to tensile strength of 700 MPa ≤ Rm ≤ 950 MPa
HSS Drill type N Plain Carbide Drill
Machining Diameter Cutting speed Feed Type of Cutting Speed Feed Type of
Operation (mm) (m/min) (mm/rev) tool (m/min) (mm/rev) tool
1 0.025 – 0.05 0.025 – 0.05
3 0.12 – 0.20 0.05 – 0.12
P20 – P40
6 0.19 – 0.27 S4 TiN 0.05 – 0.15
DRILLING 10 – 40 80 – 180 or K40
12 0.25 – 0.32 Coated 0.10 – 0.25
TiN coated
15 0.28 – 0.35 0.13 – 0.27
20 0.32 – 0.40 0.15 – 0.30
DRILLING:
1. The quality of the cutting lubricant is important. There must be a large quantity (pressure+steady flow) coming
through regularly. On the large drills, it is recommended to use drills with oil holes (internal lubrication).
2. The cutting conditions recommended are valid for a depth of drilling equal to 4 x f maximum.
3. We would advise you use drills with a pointed angle of approximately 118°.
LUBRICANT:
We recommend lubricant with extreme pressure additives.
REMARKS ON THE TOOLING:
For the type of coating of the coated carbide tips (inserts), we recommend those with a final visible layer of
TiN, generally gold colour. 123
 ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

7.4 MACHININING OF ALUMINIUM ALLOYS

7.4.1 GENERAL INFORMATION
Aluminium is generally easier to machine than steel, because it is a much softer material. The
machining of aluminium, compared to a steel grade of similar strength, takes 2 to 3 times less
energy. Whilst the specific cutting force of medium carbon steels like M1020 or M1030 is 2000
– 2200 MPa, the specific cutting force of aluminium alloys Atlas 2011 and Atlas 6262 is 800
– 900 MPa. The low machining costs of aluminium hence make it an attractive material.

The relative softness of aluminium also creates problems in machining, such as the low chipability –
the tendency to form long stringers of chips – and the ‘sticky’ behaviour – the tendency of aluminium
part to stick to the cutting tool.

This build-up phenomenon is mostly present at low cutting speeds, when a false cutting edge of the
cutting tool is formed by material sticking on to the tool. The build-up can be reduced by:

• increasing the surface speed, aluminium is very suitable for high-speed

machining due to its high thermal conductivity
• increasing the cutting angle to its maximum
• using a lubrication that is suitable for aluminium
• increase the feed rate

Ceramic cutting materials (i.e. Cermet) are not recommended for machining aluminium since the
matrix of this material has a chemical affinity for the aluminium thus making it difficult to achieve a
satisfactory operating life.

Whilst uncoated carbide inserts in grades K01 and K10 are recommended for machining aluminium
machining bar, coated carbide inserts have proved to be unsatisfactory. Titanium compounds (TiN)
are mostly used as coating material and titanium has a chemical affinity with aluminium. Therefore,
titanium diffuses out of the hard coating so that this soon loses its effectiveness.

Tools made out of high-speed steels offer the following advantages: high toughness, high bending
strength, ease of working, low price. Toughness is important, especially since the slim form of the
cutting tool typically used for cutting aluminium has a higher tendency to break than tools with a
negative geometry (as are typical for cutting steel). HSS tools suitable to be used with aluminium
machining bar and an acceptable tool operating life can be achieved.

Diamond tools have substantially longer operating lives compared to carbide-tipped tools, but also
higher precision and better operating stability. Currently polycrystalline diamond (PCD) tools are
widely used for machining aluminium alloys. PCD tools have cutting properties which are much
superior to those of carbide tools. Diamond tools also allow for extremely high machining speeds
(Vc > 1000m/min).

As for machinability, aluminium alloys have been classified into four groups. The standard stock
alloys marketed by Atlas Specialty Metals – 2011 and 6262 – are all part of group 2.

Group 2 consists of hardened aluminium alloys with Silicon content lower than 10%. Generally
these alloys are very machinable due to their high hardness compared to other alluminium alloys.
Depending on the alloy machining speeds vary from medium to high. All the alloys of group 2 are
short-chipping.

124
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

7.4.2 TURNING
The guidelines for machining with uncoated carbide inserts are shown in the table below.
Feed Rate Cutting Speed
Product Depth of cut (mm) Tool
(mm/rev) Coated Carbide (m/min)
3–4 0.75 – 1.00 220 – 250 Roughing (K10)
Atlas 2011 1–2 0.40 – 0.65 300 – 350 Medium (K10)
0.1 – 0.4 0.05 – 0.20 400 – 500 Finishing (K01-K10)

Feed Rate Cutting Speed

Product Depth of cut (mm) Tool
(mm/rev) Coated Carbide (m/min)
3–4 0.65 – 0.90 190 – 220 Roughing (K10)
Atlas 6262 1–2 0.30 – 0.55 250 – 320 Medium (K10)
0.1 – 0.4 0.05 – 0.20 350 – 450 Finishing (K01-K10)

7.4.3 MILLING
The machining parameters in the tables below are for use of cutters with indexable uncoated
carbide inserts.
Feed per Tooth Cutting Speed
Product Operation Tool
(mm/rev) Coated Carbide (m/min)

Roughing 0.20 – 0.35 200 – 500 Roughing (K10)

Atlas 2011
Finishing 0.05 – 0.15 400 – 700 Finishing (K01-K10

Feed per Tooth Cutting Speed

Product Operation Tool
(mm/rev) Coated Carbide (m/min)

Roughing 0.15 – 0.30 180 – 450 Roughing (K10)

Atlas 6262
Finishing 0.05 – 0.15 350 – 600 Finishing (K01-K10

7.4.4 DRILLING
The type W-drills with a point angle of 140° and a helix angle between 30° and 40° are most
suitable for aluminium. It is generally recommended to use drills having keen cutting edges and
polished surfaces for aluminium. A high polish in the flutes minimises friction and thus reduces
material buildup. Since the cutting speeds (ca. 100 m/min) used while drilling are small, the danger
of material buildup is large. Aluminium can be drilled using larger feeds than for drilling steel.
Standard drilling parameters for SOLID CARBIDE drills, for drilling with internal coolant supply.
Feed Rate (mm/rev) for various drill diameters (mm)
Product Cutting Speed (m/min)
2–3 4–6 7 – 10 11 – 15 16 – 20 21 – 32

Atlas 2011
90 – 110 0.12 0.22 0.30 0.40 0.50 0.55
Atlas 6262

Standard drilling parameters for INDEXABLE CARBIDE INSERT drills, drilling with external coolant
supply.
Feed Rate (mm/rev) for various drill diameters (mm)
Product Cutting Speed (m/min)
< 25 25 – 40 > 40

Atlas 2011
200 – 325 0.08 – 0.12 0.11 – 0.27 0.11 – 0.27
Atlas 6262
125
5. NON-DESTRUCTIVE TESTING OF ATLAS BAR PRODUCTS 8. TECHNICAL DATA
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

8.1 DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCES

AS 1654 / ISO 286 nominal size tolerances for round bar (µm)
Nominal Bar Diameter (mm)

Tolerance Over Over Over Over Over Over Over Over Over Over Over Over
Grade 3 6 10 18 30 50 80 120 180 250 315 400
Up To
3 Up To Up To Up To Up To Up To Up To Up To Up To Up To Up To Up To Up To
IT
6 10 18 30 50 80 120 180 250 315 400 500

5 4 5 6 8 9 11 13 15 18 20 23 25 27

6 6 8 9 11 13 16 19 22 25 29 32 36 40

7 10 12 15 18 21 25 30 35 40 46 52 57 63

8 14 18 22 27 33 39 46 54 63 72 81 89 97

9 25 30 36 43 52 62 74 87 100 115 130 140 155

10 40 48 58 70 84 100 120 140 160 185 210 230 250

11 60 75 90 110 130 160 190 220 250 290 320 360 400

12 100 120 150 180 210 250 300 350 400 460 520 570 630

13 140 180 220 270 330 390 460 540 630 720 810 890 970

14 250 300 360 430 520 620 740 870 1000 1150 1300 1400 1550

15 400 480 580 700 840 1000 1200 1400 1600 1850 2100 2300 2500

16 600 750 900 1100 1300 1600 1900 2200 2500 2900 3200 3600 4000

Example: Nominal Bar Diameter = 45mm

Example 1: 45mm h8
"h" is a minus tolerance Max. diameter = 45.000mm
Min. diameter = 44.961mm

Example 2: 45mm js10

"js" is an even tolerance Max. diameter = 45.050mm
Min. diameter = 44.950mm

Example 3: 45mm k12

Max. diameter = 45.25mm
"k" is a plus tolerance
Min. diameter = 45.000mm

Note: k tolerances are according to the above

table between k8 and k13 only.

129
 ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

8.2 METRIC – IMPERIAL CONVERSION CHART

INCHES METRIC INCHES METRIC INCHES METRIC

FRACTIONAL DECIMAL mm FRACTIONAL DECIMAL mm FRACTIONAL DECIMAL mm

. 0.0039 0.1000 . 0.1969 5.0000 . 0.5512 14.0000
. 0.0079 0.2000 13/64 0.2031 5.1594 9/16 0.5625 14.2875
. 0.0118 0.3000 . 0.2165 5.5000 . 0.5709 14.5000
1/64 0.0156 0.3969 7/32 0.2188 5.5563 37/64 0.5781 14.6844
. 0.0157 0.4000 15/64 0.2344 5.9531 . 0.5906 15.0000
. 0.0197 0.5000 . 0.2362 6.0000 19/32 0.5938 15.0813
. 0.0236 0.6000 . 0.2500 6.3500 39/64 0.6094 15.4781
. 0.0276 0.7000 . 0.2559 6.5000 . 0.6102 15.5000
1/32 0.0313 0.7938 17/64 0.2656 6.7469 5/8 0.6250 15.8750
. 0.0315 0.8000 . 0.2756 7.0000 . 0.6299 16.0000
. 0.0354 0.9000 9/32 0.2813 7.1438 41/64 0.6406 16.2719
. 0.0394 1.0000 . 0.2953 7.5000 . 0.6496 16.5000
. 0.0433 1.1000 19/64 0.2969 7.5406 21/32 0.6563 16.6688
3/64 0.0469 1.1906 5/16 0.3125 7.9375 . 0.6693 17.0000
. 0.0472 1.2000 . 0.3150 8.0000 43/64 0.6719 17.0656
. 0.0512 1.3000 21/64 0.3281 8.3344 11/16 0.6875 17.4625
. 0.0551 1.4000 . 0.3346 8.5000 . 0.6890 17.5000
. 0.0591 1.5000 11/32 0.3438 8.7313 45/64 0.7031 17.8594
1/16 0.0625 1.5875 . 0.3543 9.0000 . 0.7087 18.0000
. 0.0630 1.6000 23/64 0.3594 9.1281 23/32 0.7188 18.2563
. 0.0669 1.7000 . 0.3740 9.5000 . 0.7283 18.5000
. 0.0709 1.8000 3/8 0.3750 9.5250 47/64 0.7344 18.6531
. 0.0748 1.9000 25/64 0.3906 9.9219 . 0.7480 19.0000
5/64 0.0781 1.9844 . 0.3937 10.0000 3/4 0.7500 19.0500
. 0.0787 2.0000 13/32 0.4063 10.3188 49/64 0.7656 19.4469
. 0.0827 2.1000 . 0.4134 10.5000 . 0.7677 19.5000
. 0.0866 2.2000 27/64 0.4219 10.7156 25/32 0.7813 19.8438
. 0.0906 2.3000 . 0.4331 11.0000 . 0.7874 20.0000
3/32 0.0938 2.3813 7/16 0.4375 11.1125 51/64 0.7969 20.2406
. 0.0945 2.4000 . 0.4528 11.5000 . 0.8071 20.5000
. 0.0984 2.5000 29/64 0.4531 11.5094 13/16 0.8125 20.6375
7/64 0.1094 2.7781 15/32 0.4688 11.9063 . 0.8268 21.0000
. 0.1181 3.0000 . 0.4724 12.0000 53/64 0.8281 21.0344
1/8 0.1250 3.1750 31/64 0.4844 12.3031 27/32 0.8438 21.4313
. 0.1378 3.5000 . 0.4921 12.5000 . 0.8465 21.5000
9/64 0.1406 3.5719 1/2 0.5000 12.7000 55/64 0.8594 21.8281
5/32 0.1563 3.9688 . 0.5118 13.0000 . 0.8661 22.0000
. 0.1575 4.0000 33/64 0.5156 13.0969 7/8 0.8750 22.2250
11/64 0.1719 4.3656 17/32 0.5313 13.4938 . 0.8858 22.5000
. 0.1772 4.5000 . 0.5315 13.5000 57/64 0.8906 22.6219
3/16 0.1875 4.7625 35/64 0.5469 13.8906 . 0.9055 23.0000
130
ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

INCHES METRIC INCHES METRIC INCHES METRIC

FRACTIONAL DECIMAL mm FRACTIONAL DECIMAL mm FRACTIONAL DECIMAL mm

29/32 0.9062 23.0188 . 1.8898 48.0000 . 3.3071 84.0000

59/64 0.9219 23.4156 . 1.9291 49.0000 . 3.3465 85.0000
. 0.9252 23.5000 . 1.9685 50.0000 . 3.3858 86.0000
15/16 0.9375 23.8125 2 2.0000 50.8000 . 3.4252 87.0000
. 0.9449 24.0000 . 2.0079 51.0000 . 3.4646 88.0000
61/64 0.9531 24.2094 . 2.0472 52.0000 3 1/2 3.5000 88.9000
. 0.9646 24.5000 . 2.0866 53.0000 . 3.5039 89.0000
31/32 0.9688 24.6063 . 2.1260 54.0000 . 3.5433 90.0000
. 0.9843 25.0000 . 2.1654 55.0000 . 3.5827 91.0000
63/64 0.9844 25.0031 . 2.2047 56.0000 . 3.6220 92.0000
1 1.0000 25.40 . 2.2441 57.0000 . 3.6614 93.0000
. 1.0039 25.5000 2 1/4 2.2500 57.1500 . 3.7008 94.0000
. 1.0236 26.0000 . 2.2835 58.0000 . 3.7402 95.0000
. 1.0433 26.5000 . 2.3228 59.0000 . 3.7795 96.0000
. 1.0630 27.0000 . 2.3622 60.0000 . 3.8189 97.0000
. 1.0827 27.5000 . 2.4016 61.0000 . 3.8583 98.0000
. 1.1024 28.0000 . 2.4409 62.0000 . 3.8976 99.0000
. 1.1220 28.5000 . 2.4803 63.0000 . 3.9370 100.0000
. 1.1417 29.0000 2 1/2 2.5000 63.5000 4 4.0000 101.6000
. 1.1614 29.5000 . 2.5197 64.0000 . 4.3307 110.0000
. 1.1811 30.0000 . 2.5591 65.0000 4 1/2 4.5000 114.3000
. 1.2205 31.0000 . 2.5984 66.0000 . 4.7244 120.0000
1 1/4 1.2500 31.7500 . 2.6378 67.0000 5 5.0000 127.0000
. 1.2598 32.0000 . 2.6772 68.0000 . 5.1181 130.0000
. 1.2992 33.0000 . 2.7165 69.0000 . 5.5118 140.0000
. 1.3386 34.0000 2 3/4 2.7500 69.8500 . 5.9055 150.0000
. 1.3780 35.0000 . 2.7559 70.0000 6 6.0000 152.4000
. 1.4173 36.0000 . 2.7953 71.0000 . 6.2992 160.0000
. 1.4567 37.0000 . 2.8346 72.0000 . 6.6929 170.0000
. 1.4961 38.0000 . 2.8740 73.0000 . 7.0866 180.0000
1 1/2 1.5000 38.1000 . 2.9134 74.0000 . 7.4803 190.0000
. 1.5354 39.0000 . 2.9528 75.0000 . 7.8740 200.0000
. 1.5748 40.0000 . 2.9921 76.0000 8 8.0000 203.2000
. 1.6142 41.0000 3 3.0000 76.2000 . 9.8425 250.0000
. 1.6535 42.0000 . 3.0315 77.0000 10 10.0000 254.0000
. 1.6929 43.0000 . 3.0709 78.0000 20 20.0000 508.0000
. 1.7323 44.0000 . 3.1102 79.0000 30 30.0000 762.0000
1 3/4 1.7500 44.4500 . 3.1496 80.0000 40 40.0000 1016.000
. 1.7717 45.0000 . 3.1890 81.0000 60 60.0000 1524.000
. 1.8110 46.0000 . 3.2283 82.0000 80 80.0000 2032.000
. 1.8504 47.0000 . 3.2677 83.0000 100 100.0000 2540.000
131
 ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS ♦ TECHNICAL HANDBOOK OF BAR PRODUCTS

8.3 HARDNESS CONVERSION TABLE – CARBON & LOW ALLOY STEELS

Brinell Vickers Rockwell Tensile Brinell Vickers Rockwell Tensile Brinell Vickers Rockwell Tensile
HB HV HRC Strength MPa HB HV HRC Strength MPa HB HV HRC Strength MPa

100 105 335 340 357 36.3 1149 580 610 55.7 2030
105 110 350 345 362 37.0 1165 585 615 55.9 2052
110 115 373 350 367 37.5 1183 590 621 56.3 2073
115 120 388 355 373 38.1 1201 595 626 56.6 2091
These conversions should not be used to determine compliance with specifications. This table does not apply to austenific stainless steels.

120 126 403 360 378 38.7 1217 600 631 56.8 2109
Note: Conversions between hardness scales and particulary conversions between hardness and tensile strength are approximate only.

125 131 418 365 384 39.2 1234 605 636 57.1 2132
130 137 438 370 389 39.7 1251 610 642 57.4 2152
135 142 456 370 389 39.7 1251 615 647 57.6 2169
140 147 471 375 394 40.2 1271 655 58.0
145 152 488 380 400 40.8 1290 660 58.3
150 158 504 385 405 41.3 1305 665 58.5
155 163 525 390 410 41.8 1320 670 58.8
160 168 539 395 415 42.3 1338 675 59.0
165 173 557 400 421 42.8 1353 680 59.2
170 179 572 405 426 43.3 1371 685 59.4
175 184 591 410 431 43.7 1389 690 59.7
180 189 607 415 436 44.2 1407 695 59.9
185 194 625 420 442 44.7 1427 700 60.1
190 200 640 425 447 45.1 1445 705 60.3
195 205 660 430 452 45.4 1461 710 60.5
200 210 678 435 457 45.9 1478 715 60.8
205 215 693 440 463 46.4 1494 720 61.0
210 221 708 445 468 46.7 1512 725 61.2
215 226 724 450 473 47.1 1532 730 61.5
220 231 744 455 478 47.6 1550 735 61.6
225 236 761 460 484 47.9 1571 740 61.8
230 242 20.7 776 465 489 48.3 1591 745 61.9
235 247 21.7 791 470 494 48.6 1611 750 62.1
240 252 22.7 810 475 500 49.1 1630 755 62.2
245 257 23.7 827 480 505 49.5 1644 760 62.5
250 263 24.5 844 485 510 49.8 1665 765 62.6
255 268 25.3 859 490 515 50.2 1685 770 62.8
260 273 26.2 877 495 521 50.5 1704 780 63.3
265 278 26.9 896 500 526 50.8 1724 790 63.6
270 284 27.6 912 505 531 51.1 1744 800 64.0
275 289 28.4 927 510 536 51.5 1764 810 64.4
280 294 29.2 950 515 542 51.8 1782 820 64.7
285 300 29.8 965 520 547 52.0 1801 830 65.0
290 305 30.5 980 525 552 52.4 1818 835 65.1
295 310 31.0 995 530 557 52.8 1838 840 65.3
300 315 31.6 1015 535 563 53.1 1855 850 65.6
305 321 32.3 1033 540 568 53.4 1873 860 65.9
310 326 32.8 1048 545 573 53.7 1893 870 66.1
315 331 33.4 1063 550 578 54.0 1916 880 66.4
320 336 34.0 1083 555 584 54.3 1934 890 66.6
325 341 34.6 1101 560 589 54.6 1952 900 67.0
330 346 35.2 1116 565 594 54.9 1973 910 67.2
335 352 35.7 1131 570 600 55.2 1995 920 67.5
132 340 357 36.3 1149 575 605 55.4 2013 930 67.7
PRINTED: JANUARY 2005 – EDITION #1

LIMITATION OF LIABILITY

The information contained in this Handbook is not intended to be an exhaustive statement of all
relevant data applicable to special and general steel products. It has been designed as a guide for
customers of Atlas Specialty Metals. No responsibility is implied or accepted for or in conjunction
with quality or standard of any product or its suitability for any purpose or use.

It is the responsibility of the user to ensure product specified is fit for the purpose intended.

All conditions, warranties, obligations and liabilities of any kind which are or may be implied or
imposed to the contrary by any statute, rule or regulation or under the general law and whether
arising from the negligence of the Company, its servants or otherwise are hereby excluded except to
the extent that the Company may be prevented by any statute, rule or regulation from doing so.

Published by Atlas Specialty Metals Technical Services Department

Copyright © Atlas Specialty Metals

“….you know mate, developing and

innovating my products is ongoing; so is
the support of my supplier”
Nat Prendergast
Prendergast Fasteners Pty Ltd
Queensland
 ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS

Atlas Specialty Metals – Technical Handbook of Bar Products

The Atlas Specialty Metals

Technical Handbook
of

Bar Products

ATLAS SPECIALTY METALS

TECHNICAL SERVICES DEPARTMENT

Copyright © Atlas Specialty Metals Technical Assistance: Freecall 1800 818 599
Revised: January 2005 Email: tech@atlasmetals.com.au

TECHNICAL SERVICES 1800 818 599

Email: tech@atlasmetals.com.au

PROJECT SERVICES (03) 9272 9999

Email: projects@atlasmetals.com.au www.atlasmetals.com.au www.atlasmetals.com.au